diff options
Diffstat (limited to '21832-h')
30 files changed, 10303 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/21832-h/21832-h.htm b/21832-h/21832-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..980427b --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/21832-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,10303 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Wonder Island Boys: Conquest of the Savages, by Roger Thompson Finlay</title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + + @media print { + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit; + text-align: right; color: gray; display: none; visibility: hidden; } + } + @media screen { + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit; + text-align: right; color: gray; display: inline; visibility: visible;} + .pagenum a {text-decoration:none; color:#444;} + .pagenum a:hover {color:#F00;} + } + + div.frontmatter {max-width: 48em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + page-break-before: always; } + + body > p { text-align: justify; text-indent: .5em; + max-width: 40em; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + + p {margin-top: .33em; font-size: medium; margin-bottom: 0em;} + p.noindent {text-indent: 0em; text-align: justify;} + p.center {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;} + p.titleblock {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: center; line-height: 125%;} + p.titleblockl {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: left; line-height: 125%;} + p.chapter {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; line-height: 100%;} + + h2+p, h3+p { text-indent: 0; } + + h1,h2,h3,h4 { + text-align: center; clear: both; page-break-after: avoid ! important;} + hr {width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; + clear: both;} + hr.chapter {width: 55%; margin-top: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 0em; page-break-before: always;} + hr.sorta {width: 45%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;} + hr.minor {width: 30%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;} + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + td.chap {text-align: left; padding-left: 10px;} + td.pr {text-align: right; padding-left: 6px; } + td.abstract p {letter-spacing: 0.02em; text-align: justify; + margin-left: 14%; margin-right: 0%; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: 0.75em;} + + body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} + + a {text-decoration: none;} + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + .u {text-decoration: underline;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + .figleft {margin: auto; text-align: left;} + .caption {font-size: 80%; font-weight: bold;} + .scribedcaption {font-size: 100%; font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;} + img {border: none;} + hr.full { width: 100%; + margin-top: 3em; + margin-bottom: 0em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + height: 4px; + border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */ + border-style: solid; + border-color: #000000; + clear: both; } + pre {font-size: 75%;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> +</head> +<body> +<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Conquest of the +Savages, by Roger Thompson Finlay</h1> +<pre> +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre> +<p>Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Conquest of the Savages</p> +<p>Author: Roger Thompson Finlay</p> +<p>Release Date: June 14, 2007 [eBook #21832]</p> +<p>Language: English</p> +<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> +<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: CONQUEST OF THE SAVAGES***</p> +<p> </p> +<h3>E-text prepared by Joe Longo<br /> + and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> + (http://www.pgdp.net)</h3> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p> </p> +<p> </p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 626px;"> +<img src="images/spine-cover.jpg" width="626" height="717" +alt="Spine and cover for The Conquest" title="Cover" /> +</div> + + +<hr class="major" /> + +<div class="frontmatter"> + +<p class="center"> +<span style="font-size: 150%;">THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS</span><br /><br /> +<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">By</span> ROGER T. FINLAY</span> +</p> + + + +<p class="noindent" style="margin-bottom:2em;">Thrilling adventures by sea and land of two boys and an aged Professor +who are cast away on an island with absolutely nothing but their +clothing. By gradual and natural stages they succeed in constructing all +forms of devices used in the mechanical arts and learn the scientific +theories involved in every walk of life. These subjects are all treated +in an incidental and natural way in the progress of events, from the +most fundamental standpoint without technicalities, and include every +department of knowledge. Numerous illustrations accompany the text.</p> + +<p class="noindent" style="text-align: center; margin-bottom:2em;"> +Two thousand things every boy ought to know. Every page<br/> +a romance. Every line a fact.</p> + + +<p class="center"> + <i>6 titles—60 cents per volume</i><br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Castaways<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + Exploring the Island<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Mysteries of the Caverns<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Tribesmen<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Capture and Pursuit<br /> +<br /> + THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br /> + The Conquest of the Savages<br /> +<br /><br /> + +</p> +<p class="noindent" style="text-align: center;"> +<span style="font-size: 70%;">PUBLISHED BY</span><br /> +<span style="font-size: 115%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span><br /> +<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue New York</span></span> +</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<h2>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS</h2> +<hr class="minor" /> +<h3>TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS</h3> + +<hr class="major" /> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em;"> +<a id="illus-front" name="illus-front" /> +<img src="images/illus-p003.jpg" width="400" height="607" +alt="The warriors, together with the chief and the two boys, Jim and Will, rushed to meet them" +title="The warriors, together with the chief and the two boys, Jim and Will, rushed to meet them" /> +<span class="scribedcaption">"<i>The warriors, together with the chief and the two boys, Jim and Will, rushed to meet them</i>"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_62">See p. 62</a>]</p> +</div> + + +<table width="450" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Title page" border="1"> + <col style="width:80%;" /> + <tr> + <td align="center"> +<br /><br /> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 180%; margin-bottom: .5em; font-variant: small-caps; word-spacing: 0.4em;">The Wonder Island Boys</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 145%; margin-bottom: 1em;">THE CONQUEST OF THE SAVAGES</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 0em;">BY</p> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0em; font-size: 110%;">ROGER T. FINLAY</p> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 3em;">ILLUSTRATED</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 119px;"> +<img src="images/illus-nybc.png" width="119" height="116" alt="N Y B Co." title="" /> +<span class="caption">N Y B Co.</span> +</div> + +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 5em; font-size: 85%; margin-bottom: 0em;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p> +<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0px; font-size: 85%; font-variant: small-caps; margin-bottom: 2em;">New York</p> +</td> + </tr> +</table> + + +<p class="center"> +<span class="smcap" style="font-size: 110%;">Copyright, 1914, by</span> +<br /><span style="font-size: 110%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span> +</p> + + +<hr class="sorta" /> +<h3>CONTENTS</h3> +<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> +<col style="width:5%;" /> +<col style="width:80%;" /> +<col style="width:15%;" /> +<tbody valign="top"> +<tr> + <td align="left" style="font-size: small">CHAPTER</td> + <td colspan="2" class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">I.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><span class="smcap">The Compact Between the Four Allied Tribes,</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_11">Page 11</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +The camp startled by Sutoto. Confederation of the +Tuolos, Kurabus and Illyas. A council of all the +chiefs. The Professor's address. Advising unity of all +the tribes against the hostiles. The assent of the +chiefs. The views of Oma, Uraso and Muro. How +the allied tribes met. Review of the work of the Professor +and the boys. Determine to send a force to +the Cataract. Conclude to remove all tools to the +southwest. The warriors selected. Adopting a settled +plan. Mustering the warriors. Sending for Chief Suros +of the Berees. The muster roll. John in command +of the forces to the Cataract. Blakely in command +of the home forces. The march to protect the Brabos. +A compact between the allied tribes. John and his +party on the march. Sadness at giving up Cataract. +At the Cataract. The flag as a charm. Uraso's interpretation +of the flag.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">II.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><span class="smcap">Busy Times at the Cataract. The Alarming News</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_24">Page 24</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +The tribute to the flag. A national talisman. Entertaining +the warriors. Starting the water wheel in +motion. The sawmill at work. Making spears. Gathering +and threshing barley. The roast ox and the feast. +Making bread. The surprising novelties for the warriors. +Determining to make guns before dismantling. +Building a new wagon. Uraso directing the work of +the men. The universal tattoo. Its significance. Designating +name and rank. Clothing. Blakely drilling +the army at the Brabo village. News of the approach +of the old chief Suros. The Professor and party receiving +him with honor. The conversation with Suros. +His hearty accord. Jim and Will. Their observations. +The value of unity. Sutoto's report about the confederated +tribes. Information of their movement toward +Cataract. John's scouts at the Cataract capture two +Kurabus. Startling intelligence. Interviewing the +captives. Completing the new wagon. Sending out +scouts toward the Kurabus. +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right">III.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_III"> <span class="smcap">Intercepting the March of the Confederates. The +Treasure</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_37">Page 37</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Blakely with a force to intercept the confederates. +Sutoto delegated to inform John. Reaching the Cataract. +Interesting scenes at the Cataract for Sutoto. +The scouts report the tribes to the west. Blakely's +force near the confederates. Watching their movements. +John's messenger to Blakely. Advice that the +tribes are waiting for reinforcements. The tribes on +the march east. Blakely's message to John. Blakely +intercepting the tribes. His message to the enemy. +Their surprise. To give their answer in two suns. +The message to the Professor. The Professor decides +to capture the Kurabus' village. On the march. Capturing +the Kurabus' reinforcements. The villages in +his possession. The Professor's message to John and +Blakely. A message from Blakely. Hurrying the work +at Cataract. Making guns and spears. Taro. The +treasure in the cave. Decide to take it to their new +home. Loading up the wagons. Transferring the hoard +in the caves. A messenger informing John of the battle. +Instructs Muro to go to aid of Blakely.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">IV.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"> <span class="smcap">The Surrender of the Kurabus</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_50">Page 50</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +The load of treasure. A doleful sound. The "cry of +the lost soul." Activity at Cataract. Bringing in the +flag. The trip to Observation Hill. The warriors +participate. George and Harry lower the flag. An +impressive scene. The last sad night at the Cataract. +A runner from John to the Professor. The confederates +within eight miles of Cataract. A movement to +capture them. Messenger from the Kurabus' village +arrives too soon. The flight of the confederated tribes. +The Kurabus determine to defend their village. John +orders a forced march to assist the Professor. The +messenger from Muro advises the Professor. He learns +of the approach of the Professor. The arrival of John. +The confederates at the Kurabus' village. Surprise +of the latter at the leniency of the Professor. Advancing +on the Kurabus' village. A messenger from, +the Kurabus. Agree to surrender. The flight of the +Tuolos and Illyas. The Kurabus join the allies. Submission. +Tastoa's message to the other tribes.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">V.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_V"> <span class="smcap">The New Town Site. The Water Wheel and Sawmill</span> +</a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_62">Page 62</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Return to the Brabo village. The train from Cataract +in sight. The triumphal entrance into the village. +The festivities. Safety of the Brabos assured. The +Professor tells the chiefs his object in forming the +alliance. Suggests the building of a new town. To +belong to all the tribes. To take all the chiefs to the +new town. The boys want their herd of yaks. Sutoto +and party go for them. Blakely's fighting force. The +Banyan tree. Its peculiar growth. Sap in trees. +Capillary attraction. Hunting a town site. Uraso +selects a place. A water-fall. An ideal spot. Reported +arrival of the herd. Fencing off a field. How +the fence was built. The warriors at work. Building +a new water wheel. Erecting a sawmill. The warriors +at work bringing in logs. The sawmill at work.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">VI.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"> <span class="smcap">Building Up the New Town</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_74">Page 74</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Disquieting rumors of the confederates. Shop and +laboratory put up. A safe place for the treasure. +Making looms. Searching for minerals. Putting +up a furnace and smelter. Making molds for +copper coins. The mint. Teaching the people how +to use money. First lessons in industry. The +measure of value. Coins of no value. Paying +wages. Inculcating the ideas of pay for labor. Teaching +natives the principles of purchase and sale. Making +bargains. Begin the erection of buildings. The +Tuolos and Illyas still bitter. Evidences of hostilities. +Decide to conquer the Tuolos. John at the head of +an expedition. The natives encouraged to bring in +all kinds of vegetables. Chica. Burning oil. Why +different plants grow differently on the same soil. +Ralph and Tom accompany John on the expedition. +Going to visit the tribe which captured them.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">VII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"> <span class="smcap">The Expedition Against the Tuolos</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_86">Page 86</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Crossing the West River. Approaching the Tuolos village +from the south. The advance scouts. First signs +of the Tuolos. The feasting at the village. Ralph and +Tom wander from the camp. They discover a cave. +Striking a match. The weird interior. Leave the cave +to notify John. Return to the cave. A hurried exploration. +The home of the Medicine men. Their absence +at the village. Meeting the Medicine men at +the entrance. Effecting a capture. The Krishnos. A +curious cross found by John in the cave. Its history. +The uproar in the village. John confronting the +Medicine men. They tell him the Great Spirit will +destroy him. John strikes a light on the cross with, +matches. The Medicine men in terror. Orders one +of them to go to the village and tell the Chief to surrender. +Surrounding the village. Muro captures a +rival set of Medicine men. Another cave. Questioning +the newly-arrived captives. They are defiant.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">VIII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"> <span class="smcap">The Submission of the Tuolos</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_100">Page 100</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Threatening the Medicine men. Beating them for lying. +Morning. Dissensions in the village. Learn they are +surrounded. The Chief comes forward. Meeting John +and Muro. John's plain talk to the Chief. Demands +his immediate surrender. The Chief stunned. Says he +will go and tell his people. The Chief returns. Surrenders. +The warriors march into the village. Liberating +the captured Brabos. Ralph and Tom visit +the large hut where they were confined. Blakely +showing the Chief the maneuvers of the warriors. +The Chief proposes to torture the Medicine men. John +interferes. Asks that they be turned over to him. +The Professor and the colony. The insulting message +from the Illyas. The messenger to John. Building +chairs and tables. Two-and three-room cottages. +Stimulating individual efforts. The first thief and +the treatment. John and party visit the cave east of +the village.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">IX.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"> <span class="smcap">Plans for the Benefit of the Natives</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_111">Page 111</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Entering the cave. What they found. The treasure +as John had described it. Removing it to the wagon. +The Chief, the Krishnos and a number of the warriors +taken to the new town. Approaching home. The +Chief Marmo. Meets the Professor. The welcoming +functions. Interest in the works. Watching the loom. +Trying to teach him new ideas. A lesson in justice. +Told the difference between right and wrong. Blakely +the man of business. The island as a source of wealth. +Blakely determines to stay on the island. Agree to +build a large vessel. Projecting a trip home. Agricultural +pursuits. The states. How lands were to +be disposed of. Value of land. Proposing an expedition +to the Illyas. Marmo sends a message to the +Illyas. Making new guns for the expedition.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">X.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_X"> <span class="smcap">The Peculiar Savage Beliefs and Customs</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_124">Page 124</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +The Krishnos. Chief Marmo learning. The Tuolo +workman asks permission to bring his family to the +new town. The boys find a name for the town. Unity. +The Hindoo christening. The expedition against the +Illyas. Three hundred warriors. Reflections of the +boys. Six tribes. Heading for the Saboro village. +Muro happy. A day and night of feasting. Muro's +family. The pocket mirrors. Lolo. An artisan. +Events at Unity. Two deaths. The peculiar rites. +The Spirits in the air. Rewards. Savage beliefs. The +honored dead. Lessons from the Great Spirit.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">XI.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"> <span class="smcap">Expedition to Subdue the Illyas</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_137">Page 137</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +The warriors' families. The plaintain leaf. The native +loom. Weaving. Primitive goods. A store set up. +Kitchen utensils. Bringing in ore and supplies. Sanitary +arrangements. Home comforts. Native combs. +Fish fins. An immense turtle. Tortoise shells. John +and the war party. Illyas reported in front. Character +of country. Savage beliefs. The moon in their +worship. Distance to the Illyas village. In sight +of the first Illyas. Borderlines. Double line of guards. +Illyas surprised. Capturing an Illyas warrior. Sending +him back with a peace message. A strong position. +The history of the Illyas. Differences in the +color of the various tribes.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">XII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"> <span class="smcap">The Perilous Trip of the Wagon</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_149">Page 149</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +At Unity. Suros and Oma announce they will not return +to their tribes. The return of the Tuolo warrior +and family. A cottage for him. Famished. How +the Professor explained his act of humanity to Chief +Marmo. The principles of justice. Marmo accompanies +the Professor through the town. An object lesson. +Ralph and Jim in charge of the factory. Sending +out hunters to gather in yaks. Laying out fields. +Wonderful vegetation. John and the Illyas. Planking +movement around the Illyas. The charge. The Illyas +in confusion. Their retreat. The forest a barrier. +Sighting the main village. Astonishment at its character. +An elevated plateau. A town by design. Peculiarly +formed hills or mounds. Fortified. The mystery. +Sending the wagons to the south. Avoiding +the forest. No word from the team. The teams reach +the river. Intercepted. Illyas in front. Blocked by +precipitous banks. Forming camp. Sending messengers +to John. Muro gets the message. Hastens to +relieve the force with the wagon. The savage attack. +A volley behind the Illyas.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">XIII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"> <span class="smcap">The Remarkable Discovery at Blakely's Mountain +Home</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_163">Page 163</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +At Unity. The weekly outing. The great forest to the +west. The trip of the whites to Blakely's forest home. +Driftwood. Centrifugal and centripetal motion. The +forest animals. Orang-outan. The monkeys. Reaching +the hill. The scaling vine. Reaching the recessed +rocks. The two skeletons in the rocks. A gun and +trinkets. A sextant. A letter. No identity. The +message. Effort to decipher it. A mound for the +bones. Forwarding copy of message to John. John's +examination of the Illyas' village. The remarkable +character of the buildings. Muro returns with the +wagons. The Tuolos as fighters. Two captured. Trying +to open communications. Returns of the messengers. +Defiance. Permitting the messenger to return.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">XIV.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"> <span class="smcap">The Surprise and Capture of the Illyas' Stronghold</span> +</a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_175">Page 175</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Astonishment of the Illyas' messenger. The character +of the eastern side of the town. A movement in the +night. Surrounding the town. Muro and Uraso as warriors. +The architecture of the buildings. Not built +by the natives. Different kinds of architecture. Their +distinction. Disposing the forces. The signal for attack. +John, and his party rush the breastworks. Enter +the town. The surprise and confusion of the Illyas. +Harry observes the Illyas' chief and attendants. Surrounds +and capture them. Muro makes a charge. +The chief signals surrender. Uraso surrounds the +Illyas. Marched to the great square. The conference between +John and the chief. The Doric building. The +Illyas' chief. His imperious air. Dignity of Uraso and +Muro.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">XV.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"> <span class="smcap">The Rescue of Five Captives</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_187">Page 187</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +The chief's question. John's brief answer. The chief +trying to deceive John. Questions the chief about the +messages. The lying answers. The punishment imposed +on the warriors. Orders the same punishment for +the chief. Consternation. Uraso and Muro plead for +the chief. Whipping the most disgraceful punishment +for a chief. Demands the white captives. Sama to show +the way to their hiding place. The wagon +brought out. The boys, accompanied by Lolo, and commanded +by Stut. Reach the village. The captives' hut. +The rush for the door. The five captives. Three <i>Investigator's</i> +boys. A pitiable sight. Hungry. Harry's +inscription on the litter. A Saboro and a white man. +Taking the Illyas' warriors along. Feeding the rescued +ones.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">XVI.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"> <span class="smcap">Remarkable Growth of Unity</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_199">Page 199</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Awaiting word from John. Telegraph line needed. +Wireless telegraphy. Sound and power. Vibrations. +A universal force. B Street in Unity. Visiting the +villagers in their homes. Incentives to beautify their +houses. Erecting larger dwellings for the chiefs. The +schoolhouse. A growing town. Marvels to the chiefs. +The mysterious things the white men do. The thermometer. +Teaching medicine. Cinchona. Calisaya. +Acids. The boys reach the Illyas' village with the +liberated prisoners. Making them comfortable. The +white man a former companion of John. A health resort. +The <i>Investigator's</i> lifeboat No. 3. Mystery about +the note. The commotion outside. Capturing the +Illyas' reinforcements from the south. Provisions. +Cultivation of the soil. George and Harry explore the +buildings. Trying to solve the puzzle. Arrangements +of the streets.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">XVII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"> <span class="smcap">The Mysterious Cave. Returning to Unity</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_211">Page 211</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Cornerstones. The treasure chart. Caves near the +town. A guess at the meaning of the buildings. The +Medicine men. Questioning the chief. He says John +will be destroyed if he enters the cave. John's test +of the truth of the chief's statement. The trip to the +cave. Proving that the Medicine men lied. The chief +enjoys his first ride. The cave entrance. John goes in. +He finds the Krishnos. Their conversation. John appears +before them. The consternation. Orders them +to leave the cave. Shows the chief that the Medicine +men have lied. Taking them to the village. John and +the boys explore the cave alone. No treasure. An immense +deposit of copper. Probable explanation of the +houses of the town. An immense chamber. The start +for Unity. Sighting the Saboro village. Muro's family. +Waiting to go to Unity. The town out to meet the +returning warriors. Angel at the reception.</p> +</td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="right">XVIII.</td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"> <span class="smcap">Building a Ship to Take Them Home. Peace</span>, +</a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#p_221">Page 221</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p> +Oroto surprised at the appearance of Marmo. Anxious +to see the great White Chief. The Professor welcomes +the Illyas' chief. His great surprise. Friendship. Has +no further belief in the wise men. Life and death. +Why he was brought to Unity. Peace among the tribes. +Oroto and Marmo confer. A jollification of the whites. +What had been accomplished in two years. Building +a ship for home. Sadness as well as joy. The engineering +force of Unity. How the different tribes lived +together. Rich soil. New houses. New people. A +printing press. A schoolhouse. Making paper. Many +mysteries unsolved. One thing lacking. The flag. Getting +the flagpole. The ceremony. Hoisting OLD +GLORY.</p> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="right"> </td> + <td class="chap"><a href="#GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS"><span class="smcap">Glossary of Words Used in the Texts</span></a></td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS">Page 237</a></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> + + +<h3>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h3> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_9" id="p_9">p. 9</a></span></p> +<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Illustrations"> +<col style="width:75%;" /> +<col style="width:25%;" /> +<tbody valign="top"> +<tr> + <td align="left">"The warriors, together with the chief and the two boys, Jim and Will, rushed to meet them"</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-front">Frontispiece</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left"> </td> + <td class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">"Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three picked out the most trustworthy scouts"</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-038">38</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">"The act was such a startling one that they threw themselves on the ground in terror"</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-095">86</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">"The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction which Tom and Ralph had gone on the former trip"</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-235">230</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Position of Wagon and Attacking Force</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-018">18</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">George's Old Dutch Oven</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-026">26</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">The Tattooed Arm. Antelope</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-029">29</a></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">The Taro Plant and Bulb</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-045">45</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">The Banyan Tree</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-065">65</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Showing Capillary Attraction</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-068">68</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Sample of Island Fence</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-071">71</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">The One-cent Coin</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-076">76</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">The Five-cent Coin</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-077">77</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Chica. The Gum Plant</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-084">84</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Stone Cross Found in the Cave</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-092">92</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Ancient Crosses</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-093">93</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Ready for the Happy Hunting Grounds</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-131">131</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Primitive Weaving-Frame</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-137">137</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Comb from Fin of Fish</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-140">140</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">The Marmoset</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-166">166</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Proboscis Monkey</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-167">167</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">The Mysterious Message</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-170">170</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Orders of Architecture</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-179">179</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">The Peculiar Illya Village</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-212">212</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Diagram of Cross-shaped Cave</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-219">219</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">Paper-making Machine</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-231">231</a></td> +</tr> + +<tr> + <td align="left">The Stars and Stripes</td> + <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-236">236</a></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> + +</div> + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_11" id="p_11">p. 11</a></span></p> +<h2>THE CONQUEST</h2> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h2> + +<h3>THE COMPACT BETWEEN THE FOUR ALLIED TRIBES</h3> + + +<p>When the morning sun was struggling to come +up over the mountains in the east, the whole camp +was startled by Sutoto, who, with a number of +the Berees during the night, had acted as a picket, +to observe the attitude of the defeated tribes.</p> + +<p>He made his way to the Professor, who had +taken his old place in the wagon. "The Tuolos, +Kurabus and Illyas have all united and are now +on the big river."</p> + +<p>"When did you last see them?"</p> + +<p>He held up his fingers to indicate the time, +and the Professor called to Will: "Do you know +what time he means?"</p> + +<p>Will soon interpreted the sign to mean three +in the morning.</p> + +<p>"If they have not been separated it is a sign +that they intend to continue the fight," said John.</p> + +<p>"I suggest," replied the Professor, "that we call +a council of the principal men in the tribes, and +let them fully understand what our aim and desires +are, and thus unite the four tribes in a bond +of unity. This is a most opportune time."</p> + +<p>The news of the obvious action of the tribes +to the north was soon learned by all, and when<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_12" id="p_12">p. 12</a></span> +the Professor's view was communicated there was +a universal assent.</p> + +<p>Within an hour the chiefs assembled, and the +Professor addressed them as follows: "My +brothers, I am glad to be able to talk to you, and +Uraso and Muro will tell you what I have to say. +The Great Spirit sent us here, and we tried for +a long time to tell you why we came, but you did +not understand it.</p> + +<p>"The Great Spirit is the same to all tribes; he +does not favor one more than the other, but sometimes +one tribe will understand better than the +other what he wants, and when they do know +what he says it makes them stronger and better.</p> + +<p>"We believe the Great Spirit wants the different +tribes to live together in peace, and not kill +each other, and for that purpose he has given +each one something to do. If he does that in a +right way he not only helps himself, but he helps +everyone else.</p> + +<p>"We want to show you how to do this, but before +we can start we must all be like one family. We +do not ask the Berees to give up their customs +and become Saboros, nor do we want the Brabos +to do as the Osagas do. We do not care what +you believe about this or that, or how you shall +dress, or what language you shall speak. The +only thing we should be careful to do alike is to +so work that we shall not injure each other.</p> + +<p>"It will not be hard to learn this, and we will +all be patient, and we ask you to be patient with +us. We want to show you that the ground is +your mother, and when you ask her for fruit she<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_13" id="p_13">p. 13</a></span> +will give you plenty, and you can soon learn to +make things which will make your wives and children +happy and contented.</p> + +<p>"You will know that anything you own will be +yours, and none can take it from you, and if anyone +tries to take it, everyone will stand up and +protect you. The tribes which are now to the +north must be made to understand this, and we +must unite to compel them to agree to this manner +of living.</p> + +<p>"I know that the tribes are powerful enemies, +and can bring a great many warriors to fight +against us, but we do not want to kill, nor do we +want them to kill us. Your weapons are not any +better than the ones they have, and we want to +make some that will enable us to overcome them, +not for the purpose of killing them, but only to +protect ourselves and our homes and children.</p> + +<p>"If that is what you want and you agree with +me that it is the right thing to do, we will help +you. To do that you must not fight each other. +I have heard that you do not believe in sacrificing +captives, as the Tuolos and the Illyas and the +Kurabus do, and I am glad of it.</p> + +<p>"I am told that you all know Suros, the great, +father of the Berees, and that he is wise. He +is my friend, and he must be present at our councils, +but we cannot go to him now, because we must +protect our friends, the Brabos, against the warring +tribes.</p> + +<p>"But we must also be prepared to meet those +enemies, and where we live, we have the workshop +by which we can make all the wonderful things<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_14" id="p_14">p. 14</a></span> +needed for our protection. We must go to the +Brabos' village, to be on guard, while others must +go to our village and bring back those articles, +and we will make the things at your own homes, +so we can compel those tribes to submit."</p> + +<p>These words affected all the warriors, and they +gathered around the chiefs and expressed their +willingness to do all that the Professor had suggested.</p> + +<p>One after the other, the chiefs assented, and +the Brabos were especially pleased. Their chief, +Oma, arose and said: "We have been fighting our +friends, and not our enemies, but we did not know +any better. We thought everyone was an enemy. +The Great White Chief has told us a new way +to live, and we will do whatever he says."</p> + +<p>Uraso, chief of the Osagas, held up his hand, +and turned to the people: "I was wounded by +the White Chief, and he took me to his village and +treated me like a friend. He cured me of my +wounds, and I became his friend. I left him and +tried to come back and tell my people what a +wonderful father he was, but the Illyas captured +me, and when I escaped, and returned, found my +people had gone out to fight him and his people. +This made me sorry. I cannot tell you of all the +things I saw at his village, and now let the White +Chief say what I shall do and my whole tribe will +help him. Muro will tell you what he has learned, +because he, too, knows him."</p> + +<p>"I do not know how to tell you about this wonderful +man," said Muro. "I have seen him refuse +to kill his enemies, when he could easily do it. He<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_15" id="p_15">p. 15</a></span> +healed the Kurabus, and returned him to his +friends, and that is something new for us to think +about. His enemies are our enemies, and his +friends are our friends."</p> + +<p>This remarkable scene, which took place on the +battle-field, could not be properly understood +without some explanation of the preceding affairs +in the history of Wonder Island.</p> + +<p>About a year and a half previous to this, the +Professor referred to, and two boys, George Mayfield +and Harry Crandall, who were companions on +the schoolship <i>Investigator</i>, were wrecked and +cast ashore on the island. It was fortunate that +they landed on a portion of the island remote from +the inhabited part, and for several months had +no idea that any human beings lived there.</p> + +<p>They had absolutely nothing but their clothing; +not even a knife or other tool, but despite this, +set to work to make all the appliances used in +civilized life. The preceding volumes showed how +this was done, and what the successive steps were +to obtain food and clothing, and to make tools and +machinery.</p> + +<p>They built a home, and put up a water wheel, +a workshop and laboratory; captured a species +of cattle, called the yak, and used the milk for +food, and trained the oxen to do the work of +transportation; they found ramie fiber and flax, +built a loom and wove goods from which clothing +was made; they found various metals, in the form +of ore and extracted them; and finally made guns, +electric batteries, and did other things, as fast +as they were able to carry on the work.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_16" id="p_16">p. 16</a></span></p> + +<p>In the meantime several exploring trips were +undertaken, and they learned of the existence of +savage tribes, and what was more startling still, +ascertained that other boats, belonging to the ill-fated +<i>Investigator</i>, had been cast ashore, and later +on came in contact with several tribes with whom +they had a number of fights, and by chance discovered +a tribe, the Tuolos, who held two of the +boys in captivity.</p> + +<p>These they rescued, namely, Thomas Chambers +and Ralph Wharton. Returning from one of these +expeditions they found a man at their home, who +had entirely lost his memory. This was John L. +Varney, a highly educated man, who had seen service +in many lands, and later on was restored to +reason.</p> + +<p>Prior to the present enterprise, which was related +in the opening pages, a chief, Uraso, of the +Osagas, was wounded and captured by them, and +taken to their Cataract home, as they called it, +and when healed, he had left them, for the purpose +of returning to his own tribe, so that he +might bring them to the Cataract as friends; but +he was captured and detained.</p> + +<p>During this interim, the last expedition was organized, +and after some mishaps, they proceeded +into the part of the country where the savages +lived, and on the way rescued the chief of the +Saboros, and also a former companion of John.</p> + +<p>Two weeks before our story begins, the Professor +was captured by a band of Berees, and +taken to their village, where he was instrumental +in healing the chief's favorite daughter, and in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_17" id="p_17">p. 17</a></span> +gratitude, placed his warriors at the Professor's +disposal to rescue his friends, who were about to +be attacked by the hostile tribes.</p> + +<p>The Professor saw and rescued two more of +the shipwrecked boys, who were held captive by +the Berees, and together they started to relieve +the occupants of the wagon. The various tribes +had been at war with each other, and when they +learned that the wagon with the whites was entering +their country, all sought to effect the capture; +but the enmity between certain tribes caused +several of them to unite and the three most bitter +and vindictive, namely, the Tuolos, Kurabus +and the Illyas, were opposed to the Osagas, the +Saboros and the Berees.</p> + +<p>It was fortunate that all these forces met at the +place where the wagon was located, and in the +battle which followed, the whites and their allies +won. The situation was, however, that the victory +might soon be a fruitless one, because the three +tribes could muster a larger force than the four +tribes now joined under the Professor, and might +renew the attack at any time.</p> + +<p>"Let us now see what the situation is," said the +Professor, to the chiefs. "I have made a map of +the island, showing where the various tribes are +located, and where the villages are situated, so +we may all have a like understanding."</p> + +<p>"I would suggest," said John, "that a part of +the force be sent to the Cataract and bring all the +machinery and stock we have at that place, to this +part of the island, where it can be set up and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_18" id="p_18">p. 18</a></span> +operated. In that way we can the more readily +teach the people how to do the work."</p> + +<p>"That is absolutely necessary, as it is too far off +where the plant is now located, to be of service +to us."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 368px;"> +<a id="illus-018" name="illus-018" /> +<a href="#p_18"> +<img src="images/illus-fig1-p018.png" width="368" height="311" +alt="Fig. 1. Position of the Wagon and attacking Forces." +title="Fig. 1. Position of the Wagon and attacking Forces." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 1. <span class="u">Position</span> <span class="u">of</span> +<span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Wagon</span> <span class="u">and</span> <span class="u">attacking</span> <span class="u">Forces</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"If you will allow me to say something it +might help us," remarked Muro. "Let the Professor +select a certain number of warriors from +each tribe, to go to your village and bring the +things here, and others will remain, and watch +our enemies."</p> + +<p>"That is a good idea," observed Blakely, "but +before doing that I think we ought to muster our +forces, so that we may know what we have to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_19" id="p_19">p. 19</a></span> +depend on, and the chiefs can tell us who are the +best fitted for the various tasks."</p> + +<p>"Your view is the correct one," answered the +Professor, "and Muro, you, Uraso and Ralsea, inform +all of them what is required. I shall expect +you, Blakely, to take charge of the mustering of +the forces."</p> + +<p>The suggestion was understood and agreed to +by all, and the various tribes were arranged in +columns.</p> + +<p>The Professor addressed them as follows: "In +our country, we have a plan for everything we +do, and everything is done in order. We try to +follow the plan in which the Great Spirit orders +everything done. We want every man to do something +and be responsible for one part of the work."</p> + +<p>"While the people are gone to the White Chief's +village, others might go to the Berees' village and +bring the Great Chief Suros, as he is wise, and +we should like to have him here," added Uraso.</p> + +<p>"Your suggestion," said the Professor, "is a +wise one, and it will show how earnest you are in +making this bond a lasting one among you. I +thank you for calling attention to the matter, and +it shall be acted on at once."</p> + + +<table style="text-indent: 0;" +border="0" width="450" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="list"> +<col style="width:20%;" /> +<col style="width:80%;" /> +<tbody valign="top"> +<tr> + <td align="left" colspan="2"> + <p>The muster roll, as prepared by Blakely, showed +the following results:</p> + +<p> +The Berees: Sub-chief Ralsea and eighty-five warriors. +</p> + +<p>The Osagas: Chief Uraso, two sub-chiefs and one hundred and ten warriors. +</p> + +<p> +The Saboros: Chief Muro, three sub-chiefs and +<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_20" id="p_20">p. 20</a></span>one hundred and fifteen warriors. +</p> + +<p> +The Brabos: Chief Oma, two sub-chiefs and one hundred and five warriors. +</p> + +<p> +The whites were enumerated as follows: +</p> + +<p> +The Professor.<br /> +John L. Varney.<br /> +Samuel Blakely.<br /> +</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left"> </td> + <td class="left">{ George Mayfield,</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left"> </td> +<td class="left">{ Harry Crandall,</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left"> </td> +<td class="left">{ Thomas Chambers,</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left">The boys:</td> +<td class="left">{ Ralph Wharton,</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left"> </td> +<td class="left">{ James Redfield,</td> +</tr> +<tr> + <td align="left"> </td> +<td class="left">{ William Rudel.</td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> + + +<p>The combined force thus numbered four hundred +and twenty-four, not counting Angel. It +should be said that Angel was an orang-outan, +captured while a baby, and he had been educated +by George to do many wonderful things. It is +well known that these animals are great imitators, +but this one really learned many useful things. +One of them was to climb the tallest trees and +warn George of the approach of enemies, and +this was such a wonderful thing, that Muro explained +it to his people and they really admired +the animal, and who was, in consequence, a great +pet.</p> + +<p>When the council met the Professor said: "I +will detail one hundred and fifty men to accompany +John to our village to bring the things from +that place, and those remaining will go to the +Brabos' village to watch our enemies and to protect +the home of our friends. Ralsea should take +the litter and twenty men and go after the Great<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_21" id="p_21">p. 21</a></span> +Chief Suros, and bring him here, so that we may +consult with him."</p> + +<p>"We have thirty guns," said John, "and at least +half should be left with you while we are away."</p> + +<p>"It might also be well," remarked Blakely, "to +have the different chiefs select the most competent +men in the four tribes to whom instructions +might be given in the use of the guns, and I will +drill them and show how to handle them to the +best advantage."</p> + +<p>The four chiefs selected the men for the expedition +from the respective tribes, and the four +boys who had been together for so long, begged +that they might be of the party also, and the +Professor could not deny them this privilege.</p> + +<p>Early in the morning the entire force started +on the march for the Brabos' village, and before +night arrived at the main one, where the Professor +and his party had the first close sight of the +village and the inhabitants.</p> + +<p>Runners were sent ahead to inform the people +of the expected arrivals. This was the first time +in the history of the island that a foreign tribe had +ever visited them, except in a hostile manner, and +the curiosity of the women and children was intense.</p> + +<p>Oma, the chief, had graciously ordered the best +hut for the Professor, but he declined it with many +thanks, and presented the chief's wife with one of +the mirrors, which delighted them. Some of the +warriors were designated to procure game, and +others to bring in wood for the fires, and the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_22" id="p_22">p. 22</a></span> +most skilled were selected to scout to the northwest +to determine the movements of the enemy.</p> + +<p>In the morning, John and his party, with the +wagon, started for the Cataract home. Uraso +and Muro were designated to accompany them, +and you may be sure that to the boys this trip +had in it every enjoyment that could be brought +to them.</p> + +<p>"What a difference there is in things, now," +mused Harry, as he drove the yaks along. "I +hope they will have no trouble with those treacherous +tribes until we get back."</p> + +<p>"It makes me sad to think that we have to +give up the Cataract," said George. "The past +year has been a happy one to all of us, even +though we have had serious times. And what +shall we do with the flag?"</p> + +<p>They had made a beautiful flag, which floated +from a tall staff on Observation Hill. It would +have been a grief to permit it to remain.</p> + +<p>John overheard the conversation. "Yes; we +shall certainly take it with us, and teach the +natives here to respect it." And the boys applauded +the sentiment.</p> + +<p>In two days more the party sighted the Cataract, +and saw "Old Glory" floating from the mast. +When they saw it again, they took off their hats +and gave three cheers. This so astonished the +natives that they could not understand it, and +Uraso told his people that the flag was worshipped +by the white people.</p> + +<p>"Did you hear what Uraso told them?" asked +John.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_23" id="p_23">p. 23</a></span></p> + +<p>"No; what was it!"</p> + +<p>"He said that white people did not carry individual +charms to ward off troubles, but that they +had the flag for that purpose, and the one flag +was the charm of all the people; and he also told +them it was made a certain way for that purpose."</p> + + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_24" id="p_24">p. 24</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h2> + +<h3>BUSY TIMES AT THE CATARACT. THE ALARMING NEWS</h3> + + +<p>The flag incident, and Uraso's interpretation of +it, amused the boys immensely.</p> + +<p>"Do you know why Uraso thought so?" asked +John.</p> + +<p>"No; I can't understand why he ever had such +an idea," replied Tom.</p> + +<p>"You forget it has been our custom, ever since +I can remember, to go to Observation Hill, each +day, to watch the sea, in the hope that a vessel +might be sighted. Uraso thought that was intended +as a tribute to the flag."</p> + +<p>"After all," said Ralph, on reflecting, "they are +not so much out of the way, and the flag is really +our talisman, isn't it?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; because it is a real protection, and not +a fancied one. It is a symbol, behind which lies +all the power of a material kind, which is able to +help us everywhere, and among all people. The +charm which the savage wears, is a symbol to him, +and that typifies protection from some unknown +power. To us that is a reality, and we know +where the power is."</p> + +<p>The dear old Cataract home. How the boys +roamed over every part of it, and went down where +the cattle were still ranging around. The place +was a study for the warriors.</p> + +<p>"Now, boys, for the first day entertain your visi<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_25" id="p_25">p. 25</a></span>tors, +show them everything, and amuse them in +every way possible; and after to-morrow we must +commence work in earnest," was John's injunction +to the boys.</p> + +<p>What could be more natural than to start the +water wheel in motion? The warriors stood on +the bank, watched them push it in place, and then +the sawmill was started. The process of turning +out lumber with the saw was marvelous. Every +part of the shop was filled, as the boys set the +grindstone, the lathe, and the gristmill into +motion.</p> + +<p>When a log was finally secured to be cut into +shafts for spears, and they saw the wood-turning +lathe make the shaft round and true, their enthusiasm +knew no bounds.</p> + +<p>"Tell them, Muro, that is what we want them to +do," said John, and they opened their eyes at +the possibilities.</p> + +<p>There was still quite an amount of barley which +had not been ground, and the willing warriors +helped the boys bring a lot to the mill and the +production of the flour before their eyes was such +an amazing thing that they could not even give +vent to their expressions.</p> + +<p>Early in the day one of the bullocks had been +killed by John's order, and a roasting pit dug +out, and this was now being prepared for the principal +meal of the day, and many of them were +interested in this new way of roasting an entire +carcass.</p> + +<p>A quantity of vegetables had also been gathered +by the parties detailed for the purpose, and George<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_26" id="p_26">p. 26</a></span> +was the busiest of the lot, as he personally +attended to the cooking of the various dishes. He +had most willing helpers, each one trying to lend +a hand, so that he did little more than direct.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 348px;"> +<a id="illus-026" name="illus-026" /> +<a href="#p_26"> +<img src="images/illus-fig2-p026.png" width="348" height="195" +alt="Fig. 2. George's Old Dutch Oven." +title="Fig. 2. George's Old Dutch Oven." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 2. <span class="u">George's</span> <span class="u">Old</span> <span class="u">Dutch</span> <span class="u">Oven</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>But he was determined to have bread, and it did +not take long to improvise an old Dutch oven +with the firebrick, and in this a fire was built, so +that the bricks were heated up intensely, and the +fire then withdrawn, and a cover put over the +chimney. The heated brick, therefore, did the +baking. Loaf after loaf was put in, and while +the dough had not risen as it should have done, +owing to lack of time, still the bread produced +was something so unlike anything the natives had +ever seen, that the making of it in their presence +was a joy, to say nothing of the eating of it when +the meal was served.</p> + +<p>It was not only a picnic; it was a feast. None +there, excepting Uraso and Stut, had ever tasted +such things before. They knew what honey was, +but sugar was a novelty, and this was supplied<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_27" id="p_27">p. 27</a></span> +without stint. George had no opportunity to make +any delicacies in the form of cakes, but he made +a barley pudding in which was a bountiful supply +of sago.</p> + +<p>After the meal, John called the boys together +and said: "Before dismantling the place here it +has occurred to me that there are some things +which we ought to make, because it will take some +time to set up the parts, even after we get them +in the new locality. I believe we still have quite +a quantity of the cast-steel bars, from which we +intended making gun barrels."</p> + +<p>"In looking over the stock to-day," said Harry, +"I find we have sufficient to make at least fifty +barrels, and I have prepared the lathe to do just +what you have suggested."</p> + +<p>"Good boy," responded John. "You and Tom +keep at that, and don't mind about anything else. +If we can once get the barrels bored out, and the +fittings made, we can put them together without +having the shop in running order."</p> + +<p>"In talking with Harry yesterday," said Tom, +"we made up the scheme of putting a small bench +in the wagon, with the vise, so that we can put +together some of the guns on our way."</p> + +<p>"All that is in the right direction. And now, +another thing. The wagon we have is not at all +adequate for what we have to take with us, but +we have plenty of people to carry things, and they +will be glad to do it, but some things are very inconvenient +to carry, so that it will be of material +assistance if we build another wagon."</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_28" id="p_28">p. 28</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys looked at John, merrily laughing at +the suggestion.</p> + +<p>"Just the thing," said Ralph, "and it is easily +done. We still have the old wheels that were +used before we built the last set."</p> + +<p>"Quite true; I had entirely forgotten about that. +Uraso will help, and will be just the fellow to +direct his men. Now let us start at this with +vigor. We must return as early as possible. The +hostiles may attack the Professor at any time, and +the weapons are necessary articles."</p> + +<p>As they were about to separate, Harry remarked: +"We have a quantity of the iron which +we made, and instead of carrying it along in the +wagon, it occurred to me that we ought to forge +out some spears and bolos."</p> + +<p>"I had counted on doing that myself, but many +thanks for the suggestion," answered John.</p> + +<p>There was one thing noticeable in all the warriors, +and that was the universal tattoo. This +was something practiced by all. Referring to the +custom, Ralph asked: "What is the cause of the +tattooing habit?"</p> + +<p>John looked at him with a smile, as he answered: +"People who wear few clothes want something +with which to decorate themselves. The idea always +was and always will be, to improve on nature. +That is one of the reasons. The other is, that it +was an original way of distinguishing one individual +from another. You will notice among these +people, that the chiefs have a different tattoo from +the others in the tribe."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean that the name of each man<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_29" id="p_29">p. 29</a></span> +was tattooed so he would be known in that +way?"</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 348px;"> +<a id="illus-029" name="illus-029" /> +<a href="#p_29"> +<img src="images/illus-fig3-p029.png" width="348" height="253" +alt="Fig. 3. The Tattooed arm. Antelope." +title="Fig. 3. The Tattooed arm. Antelope." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 3. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Tattooed</span> <span class="u">arm</span>. <span class="u">Antelope</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"Yes; and also to designate his rank. The +names of great warriors and wise men of the tribe +are generally descriptive. The North American +Indian adopted that course, and it was a very +sensible thing to do. You have heard of Sitting +Bull, Rain in the Face (that is, a pock-marked +individual), Antelope, and others of like character, +could be drawn, and thus convey the name +without difficulty. Uraso and Muro mean some +particular things or objects which can be depicted, +and thus one tribe can communicate with the other, +even though they do not understand each other's +language."</p> + +<p>"Then clothing is also another way of showing +rank or title?"</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_30" id="p_30">p. 30</a></span></p> + +<p>"In countries where people are compelled to +wear covering as a matter of comfort, the clothing +was adopted as a means of expressing the +person's position in life."</p> + +<p>After John and his party left the Brabos' village, +the Professor called Blakely into consultation, +and advised him to organize the remaining +warriors into some cohesive form, and provide a +definite and orderly plan of carrying out the scouting +and picketing tactics necessary to keep them +advised of the movements of the hostiles.</p> + +<p>Blakely had already acquired a fairly good +knowledge of the rudiments of the native tongue, +so that he was able to get along well in giving his +orders and disposing of the warriors. He was +ably seconded by Ralsea and Sutoto; and especially, +the latter, became one of the most important +factors in the organization of the tribes in +making a strong and intelligent fighting force.</p> + +<p>Two days after John left, it was announced that +the old Chief Suros was on his way from the +southern part of the island, and the Professor +headed a party of thirty picked men, accompanied +by Sutoto, to welcome him. The warriors were +taken from the four tribes.</p> + +<p>They met the litter, bearing the Chief, fully five +miles from the village, and Suros was visibly affected +at the honor shown him. The Professor +extended every act of courtesy, and when they +arrived at the village, the Professor was quick +to give him the full details of all the happenings +since their last interview.</p> + +<p>"We have talked over the plans to make you<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_31" id="p_31">p. 31</a></span> +and all of your people happy and strong. I have +sent a number of the warriors to my village, and +they will bring all our things with them, so that +we may put them up in your country, and teach +your people how to build and to make useful articles, +and beautiful ornaments."</p> + +<p>"I have heard the wonderful things which you +have done, and what you have promised, and we +will try and follow your words," he answered.</p> + +<p>"I have told the people that you must be here, +as we value your wisdom. We would go to you, +but we still have powerful enemies to the north, +and they are waiting to attack us. Until we are +safe from them we cannot go to you; but when +my people return we will be better prepared to +resist."</p> + +<p>The chief was visibly affected at this consideration +for him, and he thanked the Professor for +sending the messengers.</p> + +<p>The boys, Jim and Will, were interested observers +in all that was taking place, and the Professor +had them about him at all times, and to +them he communicated his orders. Their ready +understanding of the native tongue was a great +help to the Professor.</p> + +<p>It was for this reason that the Professor was +glad the two boys were content to remain with +him. Speaking about the savages, to the Professor, +Jim remarked: "There is always one +thing which seems singular about these fellows. +They are awfully quick at learning. Now, what I +can't understand is, that, quick as they are, they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_32" id="p_32">p. 32</a></span> +do not seem to advance very much, but stay in +the same rut right along."</p> + +<p>The Professor smiled at the observation, as he +replied: "Sir John Lubbock, a noted English +naturalist, sums up his estimate of the savage +mind in the following statement: 'Savages unite +the character of childhood with the passions and +strength of men.' Their utter simplicity is their +weakness. When that is aroused, if properly +done, they become men."</p> + +<p>"But what is the great difficulty in the way of +their advance?"</p> + +<p>"The greatest writers seem to agree that the +primary want of the savage is a rigid, definite +and concise law. The idea of order does not appeal +to him, except to a limited extent. Like children, +they do not go beyond the immediate thing. +The reasoning faculties are not impaired, but are +undeveloped."</p> + +<p>But Jim's observation was true. Blakely early +discovered this in treating with the natives, and +it did not take long to make them understand +that by working together for the common defense +they could be made far more effective than by permitting +each to do as his own impulse dictated.</p> + +<p>Thus, by constant association with the head men +in the different tribes, he early learned who were +the best runners, and the most skillful scouts, and +who were particularly reliable for the different +branches of the service.</p> + +<p>Sutoto, as stated, was the most valuable factor, +and the Professor grew to love him. One day he +came in great haste, and said: "I have news for<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_33" id="p_33">p. 33</a></span> +you. The tribes are directly north of us, and appear +to be moving to the east."</p> + +<p>"Do you know how large a force they have?"</p> + +<p>"Fully three hundred."</p> + +<p>"Have you any theory why they have not attacked +us before?"</p> + +<p>"I think they are sending for more warriors."</p> + +<p>"How many more can they depend on from their +tribes?"</p> + +<p>"Not more than one hundred and fifty or two +hundred."</p> + +<p>"Do you think it is possible, Blakely, that they +have learned of the force which we have sent to +the Cataract?"</p> + +<p>"This movement to the east seems to indicate +it."</p> + +<p>"In order to satisfy yourself it would be wise +for you to ascertain their actions at once."</p> + +<p>"I have selected a hundred picked men, and +shall take the field this afternoon. I have suspicions +that they are delaying on account of reinforcements, +or waiting for reports from the runners +which they have, no doubt, sent to the Cataract."</p> + +<p>"I was rather stupid in that matter," exclaimed +the Professor. "I had overlooked the fact that +the Kurabus were the ones who attacked us at the +Cataract, and as they know its locality it is but +natural they should make an advance in that +quarter."</p> + +<p>Blakely and his men were on the way within +a half hour after this conversation. This was +now the fifth day after the departure of John.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_34" id="p_34">p. 34</a></span></p> + +<p>The Professor, and the chiefs, Oma and Suros, +were in daily consultation, and together were developing +a plan by which the different tribal interests +could be welded together, and to establish a +form of government which would be agreeable to +all.</p> + +<p>On the morning of the sixth day, after John's +party left the Brabos' village, three of the hunters +who were of the party delegated to bring in game, +and one of whom had been instructed in the use +of the gun, captured two Kurabus within a mile +of the Cataract.</p> + +<p>These were brought to John at once, and there +was high glee at the success of the hunters. +Harry was the first to see the captives and he +rushed in to John with this information:</p> + +<p>"The hunters have captured two Kurabus, and +who do you suppose is one of them? He is the +fellow we wounded and brought here with us. +Don't you remember the one we carried out at the +time I put an inscription on his litter?"</p> + +<p>John smiled, as he recalled the litter. His association +with the different ones made him fairly well +acquainted with the language by this time; but +Uraso and Muro were present. As they were +brought in, John looked at them and his brow darkened, +as he addressed them sternly.</p> + +<p>"Why are you here?"</p> + +<p>They cringed before his piercing look.</p> + +<p>"Answer me! Do you want us to kill all of +your people? Did you tell your chief when we +let you go, that we did not want war, but peace?"</p> + +<p>Neither of them answered, but shrank back.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_35" id="p_35">p. 35</a></span> +John assumed a terrible anger, as he continued: +"We healed you, and tried to show our friendship, +but you tried to kill us. Is that what you +people believe in?"</p> + +<p>Tama, who was the warrior alluded to by Harry, +soon recovered his speech, and after glancing +around at the chiefs, said: "The chiefs would +not believe what you said."</p> + +<p>"What are you here for now?"</p> + +<p>"I was sent here to see what you were doing."</p> + +<p>"How many were sent?"</p> + +<p>"No one but Reto and myself."</p> + +<p>"Lock them up," said John, "and keep a good +guard over them. So that is their game, is it? +So much the more important for us to get the +weapons ready."</p> + +<p>The new wagon was now ready for the top, +and this was completed in short work. John +started on the bolos immediately, and also forged +out a number of spears. The boys were set to +work preparing the stocks for the barrels, and +these were cut out in the rough at the sawmill, +and several more knives prepared. The most +skillful of the warriors were then instructed to +dress them up and get them ready for the barrels.</p> + +<p>The work was prosecuted not only during the +day, but at night, as well. It was fortunate that +during the time the yaks were lost, some months +before, they had trained a pair to drive, and these +were now again yoked up to give them experimental +training for the coming journey.</p> + +<p>Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and +the three picked out the most trustworthy scouts.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_36" id="p_36">p. 36</a></span> +Giving them explicit instructions to proceed westward, +and discover, if possible, whether their +enemies were making any movement toward the +Cataract, and if, on the other hand, the movement +was toward the Professor and the Brabos' village, +to send one runner to the village and the other +back to the Cataract.</p> + +<p>In less than ten days' time Harry had turned +out thirty-two barrels, and John had given a great +deal of attention to the preparation of the ammunition.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_37" id="p_37">p. 37</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h2> + +<h3>INTERCEPTING THE MARCH OF THE CONFEDERATES.<br/>THE TREASURE</h3> + + +<p>Blakely started north with the picked warriors, +and before evening came in sight of them, +headed for the east. It was evident that they +were about to go to the Cataract.</p> + +<p>Sutoto begged to be permitted to go there and +inform them of the danger of attack, and Blakely +consented, and without waiting for the morning, +was on his way. He traveled most of the night, +reaching the place in the afternoon, and was received +by John and the others with the most +effusive welcome.</p> + +<p>"What are you here for?" asked John hurriedly.</p> + +<p>"The tribes are coming this way."</p> + +<p>"I have just learned from one of our runners +that they went far to the north of you, and assumed +that the intention was to attack us."</p> + +<p>"The Professor should be warned at once," was +Sutoto's response.</p> + +<p>"I have instructed that to be done," answered +John.</p> + +<p>The scenes around the Cataract were intensely +interesting to him. He wandered around with +the boys, and asked questions on every conceivable +subject. Blakely had given him one of the +guns, and he was taken to the workshop and told<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_38" id="p_38">p. 38</a></span> +how they were made. These things so fascinated +him that, hungry as he was, he could hardly be induced +to take time for his meals.</p> + +<p>The boys admired him immensely, and together +they acted like boys. The water wheel; the sawmill; +the two stones which served as the gristmill; +the grindstones; the lathes; and the little +foundry were entrancing.</p> + +<p>When the boys took him to the blacksmith shop, +and he saw the forge, and the numerous spear +heads which John had turned out, as well as the +bolos, his eyes showed the intense delight the sight +afforded him.</p> + +<p>The next morning one of the runners appeared +and stated that the tribes were still waiting, and +also imparted the further information that Blakely +and his party were at a safe distance, and unknown +to the hostiles.</p> + +<p>It was obvious now that they were awaiting the +arrival of the two scouts who had been captured +before advancing. Several scouts and runners +were again sent forward, with instructions to return +with information the moment an advance +was made.</p> + +<p>When Blakely reached the vicinity of their confederated +enemies, he thought it wise to keep in the +background, and was at a loss to account for the +delay during the entire day, but before evening +one of the Berees, who had been sent by John, arrived +in camp.</p> + +<p>"I have just come from the white man's village, +and they know that the tribes are moving in +that direction."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 387px; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em;"> +<a id="illus-038" name="illus-038" /> +<a href="#p_38"> +<img src="images/illus-p035.jpg" width="400" height="611" +alt="Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three picked out the most trustworthy scouts" +title="Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three picked out the most trustworthy scouts" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">"<i>Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three picked out the most trustworthy scouts</i>"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_35">See p. 35</a>]</p> +</div> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_39" id="p_39">p. 39</a></span></p> + +<p>"How did they discover it?"</p> + +<p>"We captured two spies and have them as captives."</p> + +<p>This information suggested the cause of the delay. +He immediately called a runner, and indited +the following letter: "I am keeping on the watch, +and am not afraid to attack the whole of them, if +need be. If the guns you are making are not +completed, do not worry about it, as I shall keep +them interested here for several days longer. I +will not appear unless I find they have taken up +the march in your direction. Blakely."</p> + +<p>The following day the scouts informed Blakely +that the allies had broken camp and were about +to move to the east. Calling the warriors together, +he addressed them as follows: "My friends; we +are about to meet your enemies, not for the +purpose of fighting them, but to prevent them +from attacking our friends at the white man's +home. Our friends there are preparing the fire +guns for us, before they come to us, and we must +now stand together to prevent them from going +there until we are ready to meet them."</p> + +<p>The warriors all crowded around, and showed +by their attitude that they could be depended +upon.</p> + +<p>"We have with us eleven fire guns, and I will +now tell you how we must fight them, if it is +necessary. I will stand in the center of the front +line, with the guns, and on each side of us will +be the ones I shall select. All those in front will +have bows and arrows, but you will not need them, +unless they come up too close. We must now<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_40" id="p_40">p. 40</a></span> +march to the right, as fast as we can, and get between +them and our friends."</p> + +<p>The column started out on its mission, and made +its way with the utmost speed to the east, and before +noon turned to the north, being thus placed +directly in the path of the oncoming forces. The +allies moved along deliberately, entirely unaware +of the existence of any force.</p> + +<p>Before four o'clock the first signs of the advance +were observed. Blakely had selected a +strong position on a slight elevation, on the east +side of one of the little streams which flowed into +the Cataract River, that commanded an open front. +His entire force was placed between two natural +objects, the right resting behind a rocky projection +and the left to the rear of a heavy chaparral +of wood.</p> + +<p>Entirely unsuspecting, the allies marched along +the stream, and crossed not a hundred yards below. +When they were within hailing distance, John +and Ralsea suddenly appeared in front of their +concealed column, and the latter, at the instigation +of Blakely, addressed them as follows:</p> + +<p>"The white men do not want war, but peace. They +have come only to rescue their own people. You +must give them up, or there can be no peace. The +white chief tells me that if you injure or kill the +white men you now have he will hold you responsible, +because he is powerful, and is now ready to +destroy you and your wives and children, but he +does not want to do that. We are here to prevent +you from going to the white man's house."</p> + +<p>The consternation on the faces of the savages, at<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_41" id="p_41">p. 41</a></span> +the appearance of two, was easily discernible. +They listened in silence while Ralsea spoke, and, +then indicated that they would hold a council and +give their answer.</p> + +<p>It was evident that the allies were taken by surprise, +and it must have been obvious that they had +no idea of the force which was in their front. +Blakely had wisely stationed pickets to the right +and the left, in order to observe their movements, +after the first surprise was over.</p> + +<p>The conference lasted until night fell, and thus +the first object was gained; delay. In the morning +one of the chiefs appeared, and Blakely and +Ralsea again went to the front.</p> + +<p>"I will give you our answer," he said. "The +white man attacked us, and we fought him back. +He has killed our warriors, and we will not treat +with him at this time."</p> + +<p>Ralsea replied: "You have done the same that +we have done toward the white man; we were always +the first to attack them. They tried to be +friendly, but we would not listen to them."</p> + +<p>"We will let you know in two suns what our answer +is." And he withdrew.</p> + +<p>"That means," remarked Ralsea, "that they are +waiting for reinforcements."</p> + +<p>"So much the better. We will be reinforced +much better than they by the time their reinforcements +come to hand."</p> + +<p>"We must send a runner to the Great White +Chief, and tell him to stop the Kurabus from coming +to their assistance," said Ralsea.</p> + +<p>"That is a wise suggestion," answered Blakely;<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_42" id="p_42">p. 42</a></span> +and without delay one was selected and made his +way to the Brabos' village.</p> + +<p>When the Professor received Blakely's note he +called in the Brabo chief, Oma, and said: "The +forces we sent out are preventing the allies from +going to our village, and have sent a runner here +to inform us that the Kurabus are about to send +more warriors to aid our enemies. Select one hundred +warriors and let us go to the Kurabus' village +and capture the warriors who are there, +and also put the villages in our power. This may +make them understand that they have no homes +to go to unless they come to us."</p> + +<p>This information delighted Oma, and he hurriedly +gathered the warriors, and the Professor +concluded to accompany them, as he did not want +the warriors to commit any excesses against the +villages and inhabitants of their former enemies, +or exact any reprisals for the past indignities +that some of them had suffered from the Kurabus.</p> + +<p>A day's march brought them close to the main +village, and scouts were sent to the front to ascertain +whether the warriors still remaining in the +village had gone forward. Before the scouts could +return fully fifty warriors emerged from the village, +and were taking up the march to join the +allies.</p> + +<p>The Professor instructed the warriors under his +command to divide into three parties, one to remain +with him, and the others to go to the right +and to the left, so that the Kurabus would thus +be entrapped.</p> + +<p>The party marched forward unsuspectingly, di<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_43" id="p_43">p. 43</a></span>rectly +toward the position occupied by the Professor, +and he instructed Oma to show himself and +inform them that they were surrounded and that +resistance would be useless.</p> + +<p>Some, more venturesome than others, started to +retreat, but the unexpected appearance of the Professor's +warriors drove them back, and without +firing a shot or loosing an arrow they submitted. +When the Professor appeared they were the more +surprised. The whole were marched back to the +village, and, although the women tried to escape, +all were soon rounded up and brought back.</p> + +<p>The captured Kurabus warriors were taken to +the Brabos' village, and the women informed that +they would not be injured, as the white man did not +believe in making war.</p> + +<p>The Professor at once sent a runner to Blakely +and also to John. Two days afterwards the runner +appeared at the Cataract with the following message +from the Professor:</p> + +<p>"We captured the Kurabus' village to-day, and +all the warriors left there, as they were about to +leave to join the forces now before Blakely. We +have taken all of them to the Brabos' village, where +they will be held. Make the utmost speed with the +weapons. In the meantime, I have sent a force to +the north to intercept any reinforcements that the +Tuolos may forward."</p> + +<p>The message from Blakely was as follows: "We +arrested the movement of the allies yesterday, and +asked why they were determined to attack us. +They refused to give an answer, and they are, probably, +awaiting reinforcements. My forces are be<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_44" id="p_44">p. 44</a></span>tween +them and the Cataract, and they will give +their answer in two days."</p> + +<p>All this news was imparted to the people, and +the knowledge was received with enthusiasm. It +gave the warriors the first glimpse of the value +of cooperation, and the benefits of a directing +hand in their affairs.</p> + +<p>At the Cataract matters were progressing favorably. +Reports from Blakely and the Professor +assured them that they would have no difficulty, +in a few days, in getting at least thirty of +the guns ready. Stut proved himself to be the +most apt pupil, and nothing interested him as much +as the forge and anvil, and John, noticing this, +set him to work on the small anvil to forge out +arrow heads.</p> + +<p>The arrows used by the natives were uniformly +of stone, but the metal ones were perfect, and +so arranged that, with the ramie fiber, could be +readily attached to the shaft. The most deft +workers in the making of the native arrows were +selected, and together they made up a large quantity +of arrows, and Stut seemed to be indefatigable +in turning out the heads for the workers.</p> + +<p>During this period the larder was not forgotten. +The hunters brought in every day an immense +quantity of taro, which seemed to be their +favorite vegetable.</p> + +<p>This is a stemless plant, which has heart-shaped +leaves, about a foot long, and the leaves and stalks +are prepared by them in the same way that we use +spinach and asparagus.</p> + +<p>But the tuber, or root, of this vegetable is the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_45" id="p_45">p. 45</a></span> +most valuable part. It is larger than the common +beet, and sometimes grows to a foot or more in +length. This was beaten into a pulp by the natives, +and made into a bread or pudding.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 335px;"> +<a id="illus-045" name="illus-045" /> +<a href="#p_45"> +<img src="images/illus-fig4-p045.png" width="335" height="371" +alt="Fig. 4. The Taro Plant and Bulb." +title="Fig. 4. The Taro Plant and Bulb." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 4. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Taro</span> <span class="u">Plant</span> <span class="u">and</span> <span class="u">Bulb</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"I like the taro," said George. "It can be used +in so many ways, and I want to try it in the different +forms as soon as we have an opportunity."</p> + +<p>"In the Sandwich Islands, and in many other +places it is the vegetable from which the well-known +Poi is made," said John.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_46" id="p_46">p. 46</a></span></p> + +<p>"Do you know how it is made?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"It is beaten up, just as you see them do it +here, and then set in the sun to ferment for about +three or four days. It is afterwards boiled with +fowl, and makes a very pleasant dish, most appetizing +and nourishing. The fermented Poi will +last for weeks. It is the same as the well-known +kalo of the Pacific Island, the yu-tao of China, the +sato imo of Japan, and the oto of Central America. +A fine dish is made of it by boiling and then +covering the leaves with a dressing of cocoanut +oil."</p> + +<p>Harry and the other boys had been in consultation +for several days concerning the cave, and a +day or two before they were ready to start had a +talk with John about the treasure there. John +listened attentively, and when they had finished, +said:</p> + +<p>"You are quite right in wanting to take care of +the valuables there. You are entitled to them."</p> + +<p>"But they are yours, as much as ours, and we +shall not touch them unless it is with the understanding +that you shall share with us," responded +George.</p> + +<p>"I could not consider it for a moment."</p> + +<p>"You cannot help yourself," said the boys in +chorus. "We have arranged all that matter, and +you have nothing to say about it."</p> + +<p>"But," protested John. "I do not deserve it."</p> + +<p>"Well, do we?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"But you and the Professor discovered it."</p> + +<p>"Before you or Ralph and Tom came we arranged +the division, so that the Professor has one<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_47" id="p_47">p. 47</a></span>-third +of it, but we own two-thirds, and that we +propose to divide equally among all of us," added +Harry.</p> + +<p>"Really," said Ralph, "Tom and I are in the +same position as John, and we feel it is not right +to take a share, but the boys insist on it."</p> + +<p>"Well, if you consider that a settlement, I must +say that I am going to make good more than my +share and the shares of Ralph and Tom."</p> + +<p>"We don't want you to make it good," insisted +George.</p> + +<p>"But you can't help yourself in that. The cave +in the Tuolos' country has something in it that +will make you wonder as much as the treasure you +have here, and it will be fully as interesting to get +at and recover as anything you have experienced +here."</p> + +<p>"When do you think we ought to start for the +west?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Day after to-morrow will see everything ready. +We shall then have all the ammunition sufficient +to last us until we can reestablish the plant, and as +the new wagon is ready, it should not take us +more than a day, with all the help we have, to load +and apportion the different loads among the warriors."</p> + +<p>"Then why can't we take to-morrow for the expedition +to the cave?"</p> + +<p>"That will suit admirably," he replied.</p> + +<p>On the following morning the boys had the yaks +yoked up, and taking with them a number of the +copper vessels, and a quantity of the ramie cloth, +drove over to the side of the hill opposite the Cata<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_48" id="p_48">p. 48</a></span>ract +house, so as to reach the land entrance of the +caverns.</p> + +<p>"It is not desirable to have any here know of +our visit nor our purpose. It would not make any +material difference, as the treasure there is of no +value to them; but our motives will be misunderstood," +remarked John.</p> + +<p>Under the circumstances John and the four boys +were the only ones in the party.</p> + +<p>"We are going to have some pretty tough work +this morning. That gold weighs something."</p> + +<p>"Wasn't it a good thing you suggested the making +the wagon?"</p> + +<p>John smiled without saying anything.</p> + +<p>The boys eyed him sharply, and finally Harry +said: "That is what you suggested the new wagon +for, was it not?"</p> + +<p>John nodded an assent.</p> + +<p>"Did the Professor say anything to you about +bringing it along?"</p> + +<p>"He did say it might be taken if you thought +so."</p> + +<p>"Didn't he suggest that we should do so?"</p> + +<p>"No; he said the matter was left entirely to your +judgment, and that I should not say anything +about it, unless you proposed that course."</p> + +<p>"Well, I am thinking we shall have a pretty good +load for one team with what we get out of the +place," said George.</p> + +<p>"It will make a good load, but we can add to it +the lightest parts of the stock we have at the +Cataract."</p> + +<p>Before reaching the mouth of the cavern, a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_49" id="p_49">p. 49</a></span> +messenger hurried over from the Cataract with +the information that two runners had arrived +from the Professor and from Blakely, and they +drove back as quickly as possible, and reached +there to learn that another had just arrived from +Blakely.</p> + +<p>The two runners first to arrive conveyed the information +stated in the previous chapter, but +the last carried the additional news that there had +been a fight between Blakely and the tribes, and +that he was slowly moving back to the Cataract, +but there was no occasion for alarm.</p> + +<p>The latter part of the note read as follows: "Do +not be alarmed and continue your work, and if the +matter should be at all serious I will advise you +by runner in ample time, and shall in any event +send another in the next four hours."</p> + +<p>John called in Muro and said:</p> + +<p>"The forces with Blakely are having a fight with +the tribes. I want you to take fifty men, and also +twenty-five guns, and assist Blakely and his warriors, +and keep me informed of the progress of +events. Tell him that by day after to-morrow we +shall be on our way. In the meantime you should +draw them this way, as we do not want them to go +back. For that purpose keep up the show of retreating, +and hold them until day after to-morrow."</p> + +<p>Within an hour the column was ready and moved +toward the scene with celerity, equipped with the +new guns, and an ample supply of ammunition, together +with the new arrows which had been made.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_50" id="p_50">p. 50</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h2> + +<h3>THE SURRENDER OF THE KURABUS</h3> + + +<p>It was late that afternoon before John and the +boys again drove over to the hill, and lost no time +in entering the cave. The first care was to bring +to the steps at the entrance all the vessels in the +first recess.</p> + +<p>Some of them were so heavy that it was necessary +for four to carry each load. They then proceeded +to the inner recess, and here a search was +made for every trace of the treasures there, the +time required thus making it almost dark before +they were able to carry out all the different lots.</p> + +<p>These were all stored in the bottom of the wagon. +It was dark as they started for the Cataract. As +they were leaving they heard the night cry of a bird +which had often been noticed before, and Ralph +shuddered, as he said:</p> + +<p>"It makes me tremble whenever I hear that +doleful sound. It was above our head all of the +night before the Tuolos captured us, and since that +time it always sounded like an omen to me."</p> + +<p>John turned to him, as he replied: "That is +the voice of the bird called by the Spanish, Alma +Perdida."</p> + +<p>"Well it isn't a pleasant sound, to say the least," +added George.</p> + +<p>"It is very significant at this time, however," +remarked John.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_51" id="p_51">p. 51</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys all turned to him, as he continued: +"It is the 'Cry of the Lost Soul'; that is what the +name signifies."</p> + +<p>And the boys thought of the terrible tragedy in +the cave they had just left. The silence on the way +home was significant.</p> + +<p>The next morning marked the greatest activity +in and about the buildings. The wagons were first +loaded with the things contained in the shop, the +laboratory and the home. Numerous packages +were made up in form for the warriors to handle +conveniently. Nothing was permitted to remain, +as it was felt that the things they had made were +too valuable to leave behind. It was past noon before +the last articles were secured in bundles.</p> + +<p>"You should explain to them, Uraso," said John, +"that we shall have to give them pretty heavy +loads for the first part of the journey, as the different +things can be distributed to the others when +we reach them."</p> + +<p>"It will not be necessary to do this," he answered; +"they are only too glad to carry the heaviest +loads." And he refused to apologize to the warriors. +This is referred to for the purpose of showing +the spirit in which all of them worked to bring +the things to their own country.</p> + +<p>After the loads were all provided for, and the +different ones instructed as to the parts which +should be taken by each, John said:</p> + +<p>"There is one thing which must now take our +attention, and that is the bringing in of the flag."</p> + +<p>The boys had forgotten this. "You may tell the +warriors," said John, addressing Uraso, "that we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_52" id="p_52">p. 52</a></span> +intend to go to the hill and bring in the flag, which +must be taken with us."</p> + +<p>As Uraso interpreted this to the people it had +a remarkable significance to them. Uraso begged +permission to take all of them on the expedition, +and this was readily assented to.</p> + +<p>The warriors all armed, as though going forth +to battle, ascended the hill, with the boys in the +lead. Arriving there John formed the column in +a circle around the staff. Angel was present, and +he shambled toward the pole and mounted it. He +remembered the little wheel at the top, which had +afforded them such an amusing incident when it was +erected.</p> + +<p>This time he came down without much solicitation +on the part of George.</p> + +<p>"As George and Harry were the ones to hoist +the flag, I shall delegate them to lower it," said +John.</p> + +<p>The boys went forward, and at the quiet suggestion +of John took off their hats. At this signal +John took off his, and Uraso followed suit, and +the hint was sufficient for the warriors, who stood +with uncovered heads while the boys reverently +lowered it.</p> + +<p>The wonder and amazement depicted on the +faces of those who witnessed it was a spectacle. +What an impressive thing it was to them; it was +the mystery, which to the savage mind is always +an important factor, and John knew it.</p> + +<p>The flag was folded with the greatest care, the +natives watching each move with intense interest,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_53" id="p_53">p. 53</a></span> +and was then wrapped in cloth, as though it was +the most valuable treasure in the world.</p> + +<p>"We want them to feel that it is something they +must love and protect. It is safe to say, that after +this exhibition, everyone of the warriors would +have fought to the death to preserve that emblem +of power, like the Israelites of old, who regarded +the Ark of the Covenant as their fortress and +strength."</p> + +<p>The last night at the Cataract was a sad one +for the boys. For a year and a half it had been +their home. They had built every part of it. +Each portion had some delicious memory connected +with it, and all must now be left to the +ravishes of time. Only the water wheel would be +left.</p> + +<p>It hardly seems possible that the accumulations +at the Cataract would make over one hundred +packages, aside from the contents of the wagon. +When the entire stock of material was arranged +the next morning, it was an interesting sight.</p> + +<p>The two wagons were driven out from the +yard, Harry and Tom in charge of one, and George +and Ralph of the other team. Twenty-five light +loads had been made for the advance warriors, +so that in case of scouting work, one could take +the loads of two, and thus leave at least a dozen +free for that duty when required.</p> + +<p>A quantity of lumber had been cut over six +months before, and this was well dried, and would +be very valuable to them in beginning operations, +and the loads on the wagons were so great that +but little of it could be taken in that way. Uraso<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_54" id="p_54">p. 54</a></span> +saw the utility of the material and insisted that +it should all be taken.</p> + +<p>Besides the packages thus arranged the most expert +of the warriors carried the thirty-two guns, +and they had been instructed in their use. Each +also carried a bow and set of arrows, and some of +them were provided with spears.</p> + +<p>During the preceding day no message had come +from Blakely, but he knew that the party would +leave the Cataract on this day, and they felt no +apprehension on his account.</p> + +<p>One of the runners from John reached the Professor +on the day the train left the Cataract. +While the latter tried to prevent the knowledge +of his occupation of the Kurabus village from +reaching the ears of the warriors, the scouts sent +out by the Professor intercepted and tried to capture +the messengers which were sent to inform the +allies, but failed in their efforts.</p> + +<p>When John and his party left, Blakely had +drawn the allies to a point within eight miles of +the Cataract, and with the reinforcements, headed +by Muro, he made a stand. During the night, after +a consultation with Muro, the latter, with fifty of +his warriors, made a wide detour to the north, +and swung around to the west, thus taking a position +behind the allies, and this was effected without +their knowledge, as they believed.</p> + +<p>The object of this movement was to protect the +Professor, as the force from the Cataract, joined +to that of Blakely's, would be ample to drive them +forward, and it was desirable to effect a capture<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_55" id="p_55">p. 55</a></span> +of the allies, and thus at one operation place them +in their power.</p> + +<p>Unfortunately, the messengers from the Kurabus' +village reached the allies before Muro started +on his trip. The effect on the allies was startling, +and the Kurabus were determined to protect their +homes. The latter believed that the object was to +destroy the village and carry off the women and +children, and it was but natural that they should +go to their assistance.</p> + +<p>As a result the allies during the night quietly +stole to the south, which was in the direction of the +Illyas' territory, intending to march thence west, +and thus attack the Professor from the south.</p> + +<p>Their departure was not discovered until morning +had been well advanced, and Muro's runner +did not reach Blakely until the train from the +Cataract came in sight.</p> + +<p>This was most discouraging news, as it meant +danger to those left with the Professor.</p> + +<p>"There is but one alternative now," said John. +"We must make a forced march to the relief of +the Professor. Uraso has the matter of controlling +the force well in hand, and Blakely, you and +I will take all the men excepting the one hundred +in charge of the material, and go forward +rapidly."</p> + +<p>The first news the Professor had of the new situation +was gleaned from the messenger which +Muro had dispatched the moment the escape of +the allies was discovered.</p> + +<p>"Has the Professor been notified?" asked Blakely.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_56" id="p_56">p. 56</a></span></p> + +<p>"I sent two messengers early this morning," was +Muro's response.</p> + +<p>"That was a wise thing," remarked John. "You +are to be commended for the step. We must +make a forced march at once, and you must lead +the advance with your best men."</p> + +<p>Muro was much gratified at this position of +trust, and called up the warriors selected and +spoke a few words to them. Without waiting to +make any other preparations than to provide a +day's provisions, his party sallied forth, and +headed straight for the southwest.</p> + +<p>The following day, the scouts sent out by the +Professor to the southeast, discovered the allies +rapidly moving toward the direction of the Kurabus' +village, but he knew that he had not a sufficient +force to meet them, and he also deemed it +wise to permit them to reach their village, so +that they might be able to learn for themselves +that, while he had their homes in his power, he +had not despoiled them.</p> + +<p>This was surprising news to the allies. Such +a course meant, either that the Professor and the +tribes with him, were afraid of them, or, that +Blakely's message to them was in reality true.</p> + +<p>Muro's column reached the Professor the following +day, and before evening John and the main +body came up. The allies were still at the Kurabus' +village, and without waiting for the wagon +and the remaining part of the force to come up, +all started on the march for the south.</p> + +<p>The scouts reported commotion in the village, +but its cause could not be determined. Undoubt<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_57" id="p_57">p. 57</a></span>edly +they knew of the presence of the force from +the north. Camp was made for the night, and +when morning came it was evident that the Kurabus +had been deserted by their allies, the Tuolos +and the Illyas.</p> + +<p>Early in the morning the advance was begun, +and before ten o'clock a messenger from the Kurabus +was taken, and he was brought before the +Professor.</p> + +<p>"Why have you been fighting us?" asked the +Professor.</p> + +<p>"My people thought you were trying to kill +us."</p> + +<p>"Why do you come to see us now?"</p> + +<p>"Because my chief has been deserted by the Illyas +and the Tuolos."</p> + +<p>"Does he wish to surrender?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; if the White Chief will not punish him +and his people."</p> + +<p>"Have any of your warriors gone with the two +tribes?"</p> + +<p>"No."</p> + +<p>"You may tell your chief that we do not want +war, but peace and friendship, and that we will +not injure him or his people and that if we desired +bloodshed we would have killed the warriors we +took three days ago, and also would have destroyed +your villages and taken your women and +children captive."</p> + +<p>The messenger was conducted to the front, and +within two hours he returned with the message +that the terms were accepted.</p> + +<p>"Then tell your chief that all his weapons must<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_58" id="p_58">p. 58</a></span> +be brought to this place within two hours, and he +must come here with them, and surrender to us +in person."</p> + +<p>Within the stipulated time, the Kurabus, with +their chief, appeared in their front, and Muro, +with his warriors, went out to receive them. It +must be understood that Muro's tribe, the Saboros, +lived in the territory adjoining the Kurabus +to the southeast, and that for years there had +been bitter enmity between the two, but the Professor +did not affect to know this.</p> + +<p>When the chief, Tastoa, entered the camp, he +glanced around at the warriors, but did not exhibit +apparent alarm. He marched direct to the +Professor, with arms folded, and showed a dignified +attitude, notwithstanding his humiliation. +His mien plainly showed that he surrendered to +the White Chief, and not to his late allies or +enemies.</p> + +<p>In explanation of this, it should be said, that in +a previous expedition against the Professor the +Kurabus and the Saboros had been allied, and +on the way, while they were surrounding the party +of whites, had a disagreement which resulted in +a separation and enmity.</p> + +<p>"I have come to surrender to the White Chief. +The Tuolo and the Illyas would not agree with +me that you meant no harm, and that you would +do as you said, and have left me."</p> + +<p>"Then you have surrendered only because your +allies left you?"</p> + +<p>"No; but because we believed you did not want +revenge."</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_59" id="p_59">p. 59</a></span></p> + +<p>"What made you think so?"</p> + +<p>"When we saw that you did not destroy our +villages, and did not take our women and children, +when you could have done so, we believed +you. We believe the Great White Chief, but we +do not believe the different tribes."</p> + +<p>"Then I cannot accept your surrender. You +may take all your weapons and return to your +village, and if you choose to do so, join your late +allies. We will not make a movement against +you until you have done so. You must believe +Suros and Uraso, and Oma and Muro, as well as +myself."</p> + +<p>He cast a curious glance about him, as the +Professor spoke. This was a new species of warfare. +What! allow him to return and continue +the war, after he was in their power? The savage +mind could not comprehend its meaning.</p> + +<p>"Why does the White Chief offer me such +terms? I am in his power."</p> + +<p>"Because the white man does not believe in +taking advantage of an enemy who has entrusted +himself in his hands. As long as he is here he +will not permit it, and the chiefs who are with +me will not ask me to do it."</p> + +<p>"I do not understand this. Does Suros say so?"</p> + +<p>"The White Chief says the truth. He brings +us a message from the Great Spirit. That message +is different from the ones we learned. He +has told me why our message is wrong, and my +people will never again attack another people."</p> + +<p>This declaration bewildered Tastoa. He had +heard the words of the wise Suros. But Oma<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_60" id="p_60">p. 60</a></span> +arose and said: "I have been your enemy and +you have been ours. The White Chief has been +good to us, and I could not understand why. He +has told us new things, and how we may live in +happiness, and we believe him. When we took +your warriors and captured your villages three +days ago, he ordered that no one should be hurt, +and he has given the warriors the best of food, +and treated them as he treated his own warriors. +We will follow his ways."</p> + +<p>Muro's eyes glistened as he arose to speak. "I +and my people love the Great White Chief. I +have come from their village, and all they have +in the village is now coming to all of our people, +and we are to learn the new way of living. From +the time the White Chief rescued me from you, +he has said to us, 'Do not kill; do not kill; but you +have a right to defend yourselves.' They have +made the weapons which talk with fire, and there +are so many of them that they could quickly kill +all of your people, if he would permit it. Now +we are going to live like the White Chief tells +us."</p> + +<p>"Then, if the White Chief tells me I must believe +the Chiefs I will do so."</p> + +<p>"There is another thing which you must do. +The Illyas have some of the white people in captivity. +You must send a messenger and say that +if they injure the captives I will visit them and +destroy them and their villages, and that they +must at once return to us, and if they do not, we +will go there and take them by force."</p> + +<p>"It shall be done."</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_61" id="p_61">p. 61</a></span></p> + +<p>"Muro, you may restore the weapons to the +Kurabus."</p> + +<p>While the foregoing proceedings caused the utmost +wonder in all of its phases, the restoration +of the arms was one which so completely astonished +them that the Chief could hardly speak. +He finally approached the Professor, and grasping +him by the hand, said:</p> + +<p>"I have never heard of such things before."</p> + +<p>"You must have your weapons, because your +people must have food. Go to your villages now, +and take with you the warriors we took three days +ago. We have given them back their weapons, +as you see."</p> + +<p>Ralsea, Oma and Suros then pressed forward, +and held out the hands of friendship to him. He +then turned to the Professor and said: "I do +not see Uraso."</p> + +<p>"No; he is with the people who are coming from +our village, but he will be the first one to go to +you and tell you what the others have said."</p> + +<p>The first act of Tastoa was to select the fleetest +runner, to attempt overtaking the Illyas, in order +to deliver the message which the Professor +had instructed him to communicate.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_62" id="p_62">p. 62</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h2> + +<h3>THE NEW TOWN SITE. THE WATER WHEEL AND THE SAWMILL</h3> + + +<p>The Professor and his party immediately left +for the Brabos' village, and before noon of the +next day, Uraso, with the wagons and package +train, came in sight. The warriors, together with +the chiefs, and the two boys, Jim and Will, rushed +to meet them, leaving the Professor and Chief +Suros almost deserted. They smiled at the eagerness +of all. They were just like boys.</p> + +<p>When the procession from the village came up +they surrounded the wagon and Uraso's warriors, +and took the packages from the carriers, bearing +them in triumph to the village, and passed before +the Professor and Suros. The boys began the +dancing, and the warriors took up the suggestion, +and improved on it. The hilarity knew no +bounds.</p> + +<p>Uraso was the first to tell the warriors who were +with him of the surrender of the Kurabus. This +acted like a stimulant to the assembly.</p> + +<p>Later in the day, when peace and order had +been restored, the Professor addressed them as +follows: "Suros and I have enjoyed the dance +and the joys you have had as much as you who +have taken part in it. We are both so happy to +know that you have become brothers. When we +leave this village the Brabos will know that they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_63" id="p_63">p. 63</a></span> +are safe from all harm, and that their enemy is +our enemy, and that if anyone in either of the +tribes is injured it is the duty of all the tribes +to come to his aid.</p> + +<p>"You must also know that everyone has a right +to his own property. If I should take anything +from one of you I ought to be punished. Everyone +should be made to know this. If a Saboro +takes anything from an Osaga without his consent, +the Saboros should be the first to punish +him, and if they do not then the other tribes +should punish him.</p> + +<p>"We are bringing all the tools from our village, +so that we can teach you how to make many wonderful +things. We must find a suitable place to +put up the machinery. Each tribe will send some +of their people there to learn, and then the same +things will be put up in your own lands. To-morrow +we will go south to establish this place."</p> + +<p>There was one thing which was a source of +grief to the boys, and that was the herd of yaks, +which had been left behind. John spoke to Uraso +about it, and Sutoto, who always considered the +boys first, suggested that he and Muro would take +two dozen of the warriors and bring the herd +back.</p> + +<p>The boys would have enjoyed this outing with +him, but the necessity of utilizing their services +in the erection of the workshop and installing +the machinery, was too urgent to permit it. The +boys made it a condition, however, that Sutoto +should be with them in the active work, as soon, +as he returned.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_64" id="p_64">p. 64</a></span></p> + +<p>The Brabos regretted the leave-taking, but +were delighted to learn from the Professor that +he expected them to contribute a number of their +men to accompany the expedition.</p> + +<p>They passed through the Kurabus' village the +next day, and the Professor called the Chief to +him. "We want some of your men to accompany +us, because we want to teach them the same as +the other tribes."</p> + +<p>This announcement was a most gratifying one, +and he answered: "The White Chief has made +us give him our hearts. My brother and my son +will go with you."</p> + +<p>Could anything have been more expressive of +the intention of the Kurabus Chief? The lad was +about the same age as the boys, and they led +him out to the wagon, and showed him the wonderful +things, and then began the efforts to find +words to express their meaning, and enable them +to understand each other.</p> + +<p>It was an amusing thing to see the struggles +of Blakely, who was whipping the warriors into +a fighting force. Whenever Blakely was around +the warriors would give him the military salute, +as though they had been trained up to it all their +lives.</p> + +<p>"I have often wondered where the military salute +of raising the hand up to the eyebrows comes +from," said Ralph.</p> + +<p>"Its origin dates from the commencement of +the English army. During the tournaments of +the Middle Ages, after the 'Queen of Beauty' was +enthroned, the knights, who were to take part<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_65" id="p_65">p. 65</a></span> +in the sports of the day, marched past the dais +upon which she sat, and, as they passed, shielded +their eyes from the rays of her beauty. Thus +the habit continued, only in a modified form, to +this day."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 352px;"> +<a id="illus-065" name="illus-065" /> +<a href="#p_65"> +<img src="images/illus-fig5-p065.png" width="352" height="279" +alt="Fig. 5. The Banyan Tree." title="Fig. 5. The Banyan Tree." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 5. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Banyan</span> <span class="u">Tree</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>Uraso had charge of the advance, and when +they halted that day it was under the spreading +shade of a tree that was a marvel to the boys, +although Blakely said there were plenty of them +in the southern part of the island.</p> + +<p>This was a tree, with a large central trunk, the +branches of which spread out in all directions, to +distances which were fully fifty feet on each side, +and at irregular intervals were straight stems +which shot down straight to the earth, the lower<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_66" id="p_66">p. 66</a></span> +ends of which took root and thus served as supports +for the long branches.</p> + +<p>The boys went around, examining it from all +sides. "What is it?" asked the boys.</p> + +<p>"It is the banyan tree," answered John. "This +is not the only kind which exhibits this peculiarity. +What is called the screw pine also sends +down shoots in the same way."</p> + +<p>"Well, does each of these vertical stems become +a tree of itself?"</p> + +<p>"In the case of the mangrove these aerials, as +they are called, carry up the sap, and form leaves +at their upper ends, long after the main trunk +dies."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean that these drooping branches +carry up the sap in the opposite direction, after +they take root?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but that is not so remarkable, when it +is understood that the buds of all trees are, in +a measure, roots, and perform the same functions +as roots. The plum tree, and many others, +will form roots out of the buds, if the latter are +buried in the earth."</p> + +<p>"I have heard about the orchids, as I believe +they are called. Do they act in the same way?"</p> + +<p>"Not altogether; there are certain plants which +live on other plants and get sustenance from them, +just as some insects attach themselves to animals +and live on them."</p> + +<p>"There is one thing I could never understand," +remarked Tom, "and that is, why the sap of the +trees goes upwardly."</p> + +<p>"I shall try and answer that question by ask<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_67" id="p_67">p. 67</a></span>ing +another. If you put the end of a piece of +blotting paper in water, what causes the water to +travel along to the other end?"</p> + +<p>"That is just as much a mystery," he replied.</p> + +<p>"But as you know that to be so, because you +can see the process, it will enable me to explain +the principle of the movement of the sap. A +wick in a lamp becomes saturated and the oil +travels upwardly as long as the upper end is +burning; but as soon as the light is put out the +oil ceases to creep toward the burned end."</p> + +<p>"But in the case of a tree there is nothing to +do that same thing."</p> + +<p>"That is what the sun does. It shines on the +leaf, and absorbs the sap, or portions of it, and +the sap tries to move upwardly to again moisten +the dried pores of the wood."</p> + +<p>"I always thought the sap moved upwardly, because +the tree was alive."</p> + +<p>"The blotting paper and the wick are not alive, +are they? Still, you see the same process going +on. This is due to what is termed capillary attraction. +Suppose you take two tubes, one larger +than the other, each open at both ends, and stand +them in water. The water will rise in the tubes +above the surface of the water outside, and the +height it rises depends on the inside diameters of +the tubes. The smaller the bore the higher will +the water go up. So with the pores in the wood. +They are very small, and thus the water moves +to the greatest heights."</p> + +<p>It was now a question of the greatest importance +to set up their home at the most desirable<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_68" id="p_68">p. 68</a></span> +point. The Chiefs, together with John and +Blakely, had numerous conferences with the Professor, +on this subject. Many things had to be +taken into consideration.</p> + +<p>First: It should be located at a point convenient +to all the tribes.</p> + +<p>Second: It should be on or near the seacoast.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 339px;"> +<a id="illus-068" name="illus-068" /> +<a href="#p_68"> +<img src="images/illus-fig6-p068.png" width="339" height="233" +alt="Fig. 6. Showing Capillary Attraction." title="Fig. 6. Showing Capillary Attraction." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 6. <span class="u">Showing</span> <span class="u">Capillary</span> <span class="u">Attraction</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>Third: Everything else being equal, the most +desirable place would be in a section which had +the richest soil.</p> + +<p>These considerations were suggested to the +Chiefs, and all agreed that the river separating +the land of the Osagas and the Berees would be +most suitable.</p> + +<p>"I know a place," said Uraso, "where there is +a running water like you have at the Cataract, +and it is a little river that flows into the big +river."</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_69" id="p_69">p. 69</a></span></p> + +<p>"Does the water go down steep as we had it?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered Uraso.</p> + +<p>"Let us go there at once," responded the Professor.</p> + +<p>Within two days the spot was reached, and at +the sight of it all were pleased beyond measure.</p> + +<p>"It is an ideal spot," exclaimed John. "The +falls would be much better for our purpose than +the Cataract, and it is close to the river. As the +latter has ample depth for good-sized boats, and +the sea is not more than three miles away, I +judge, we are near enough to carry out the purpose +of building the large vessel."</p> + +<p>No conferences were required to make the decision. +"Your judgment is to be commended," said +the Professor to Uraso. "I do not think there is +a better spot on the island."</p> + +<p>"It suits me," said Blakely. "See the forest to +the northwest? That is where I used to live. I +know the boys will enjoy exploring it, and if they +want excitement at any time, it is near enough +to give them plenty of exercise."</p> + +<p>The boys' eyes glistened with excitement at the +news. "Won't we have fun over there, when we +are fixed up!" said Will.</p> + +<p>The Professor, addressing the Chiefs, said: +"We do not need all the men we have here, as +they will no doubt be needed for a time at their +homes, in order to take care of the women and +children. For the present I suggest that one-half +of them be sent home, and the others remain here, +and get the work started. This will take several +moons, and we must then meet, unless we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_70" id="p_70">p. 70</a></span> +hear from the Illyas sooner, and march against +them."</p> + +<p>The chiefs selected the ones which were to remain, +and those instructed to return home were +advised that later on they would be brought to +the new village, to take their part in the work, and +thus give an opportunity to all.</p> + +<p>The greatest enthusiasm prevailed, and each +tribe tried to outdo the other in generous acts. +The example set by the Professor was, indeed, a +lesson to these poor, ignorant creatures.</p> + +<p>"Professor, what shall we do when the herd +arrives? I think we had better fence in a field for +them until they get used to the people and learn, +to remain in this part of the country."</p> + +<p>"I am glad that you suggested that, Ralph. +You may build a fence to hold them, and I suggest +that you use the space in the forks of the +river."</p> + +<p>"How many men shall I take for the purpose?"</p> + +<p>"As Sutoto will likely be here to-morrow, or +on the following day, you should take enough to +do it quickly. Use at least fifty of them. Stut +would be the one to call in for help."</p> + +<p>"What kind of a fence shall we build?"</p> + +<p>"I will make a sketch of the best form for the +present. Have some of the men cut posts that +have several forks like the sketch shows. Cut +these off at lengths so that one fork will be about +two feet up out of the ground, and the other five +feet or a little more above. Set others to work +cutting the long poles, which you will find along; +the river bank."</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_71" id="p_71">p. 71</a></span></p> + +<p>"How long should we make the poles?"</p> + +<p>"Get them as long as you can; but make them, +say, nine, eighteen or twenty-seven feet long. +Then, at the same time, others can be digging the +post holes, and make those eight feet apart and +two feet deep. When the posts are set, the men +with the poles can go along and lay them in place, +just as I show."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 339px;"> +<a id="illus-071" name="illus-071" /> +<a href="#p_71"> +<img src="images/illus-fig7-p071.png" width="339" height="163" +alt="Fig. 7. Sample of Island Fence." title="Fig. 7. Sample of Island Fence." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 7. <span class="u">Sample</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Island</span> <span class="u">Fence</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>The warriors took the bolos and sallied down +to the stream. Ralph had made a mental calculation +that at least one hundred posts would be +required; the line of the fence was laid out and +the holes marked. Muro took charge of the digging +of the holes, and the men showed a wonderful +aptitude for the work. During the afternoon +the Professor wandered down to the line, and +went among them, speaking words of cheer and +commendation to all, so that he impressed his +wonderful personality on every man.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile Harry, with the other boys, was at +work preparing a new water wheel. In this he +had the aid of Uraso, as the director general of +the men. Many hands make light work. In a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_72" id="p_72">p. 72</a></span> +single day the wheel was ready for mounting. +The dried lumber which had been brought over +was a great advantage in making it, and in preparing +the bridge below the falls on which the wheel +was mounted.</p> + +<p>This was completed on the evening of the second +day, just as Sutoto came into view with the +cattle. It was an amusing sight to see how they +had brought over the herd.</p> + +<p>Apollo was the name of the bull which had the +terrific fight with the old bull. The first thing +Sutoto did was to catch Apollo, and firmly secure +him with hobbles. He was led in front, and the +others driven along after him, the rest following +meekly.</p> + +<p>When Apollo was finally loosened, and allowed +the freedom of the corral, he gave a roar, pawed +up the ground and shook his head at the indignant +treatment.</p> + +<p>Their appearance meant milk and butter. +There were thirty-five in the herd, of which ten +were young animals, from four to six months of +age, and six calves, the latter of which retarded +the movement of the drove on the route.</p> + +<p>Early in the morning the wheel was put up, and +it began to turn, to the delight of the men.</p> + +<p>"It would be better, Harry, to set up the sawmill +at once, as I have directed a number of men +to go to the forest with John, to cut the logs, and +they will take the two teams along, so that by the +time you are ready, the material will be here for +you."</p> + +<p>"What shall I cut first?"</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_73" id="p_73">p. 73</a></span></p> + +<p>"Get out the scantlings for the house and shop, +as the latter will be the first to receive our attention. +We must have some place to put the things +we have in the wagons."</p> + +<p>It is remarkable how quickly a set of men, working +under intelligent directions, can carry out a +purpose. The logs began coming in shortly after +noon, and in the morning the saw was at work, +and it did not cease its operations for many a day.</p> + +<p>The natives were so fascinated with it that they +considered it a grief to leave it. But the Professor +had other purposes in view. George and +Tom were selected to make several looms, similar +to the one brought from the Cataract. In +this work, as in everything else, some particular +ones were selected and instructed to do the work.</p> + +<p>Ramie fiber was found in abundance, along the +streams, and after a set of men had been instructed +how to cut and gather it, they were kept at +that work, while others were directed how to wet +it down and rot the woody fiber and taught the +manner in which the fiber was freed of the stalks.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_74" id="p_74">p. 74</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h2> + +<h3>BUILDING UP THE NEW TOWN</h3> + + +<p>Within a week most disquieting rumors reached +the new village as to the attitude of the Illyas +and Tuolos. The former sent an insulting message +that if the White Chief wanted the captives +he should come for them.</p> + +<p>The Tuolos had returned to their country, but +John was determined that they must have a visit. +Thus far no bands from the warring tribes had +molested either the Saboros, who were nearest +on one side, or the Brabos on the other side.</p> + +<p>Their silence after a peace message was sent +them could only be interpreted to mean one thing, +on the part of the Tuolos.</p> + +<p>"The Illyas will not dare to injure the captives +they have with such a warning as we gave them, +and if they intended to destroy them it is possible +that has been done already. Under the circumstances +a little patience on our part may show +them that we mean business."</p> + +<p>Muro, who understood the Illyas' character better +than the others, was of the opinion that the +Professor's views were most likely to accomplish +the purpose without bloodshed. On the other +hand, he was of an entirely different opinion with +respect to the Tuolos.</p> + +<p>A few weeks of active work, first, in completing +all preparations for defense, and second, in organ<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_75" id="p_75">p. 75</a></span>izing +the tribes into a working unity, would be of +the greatest importance to the community.</p> + +<p>The shop and the laboratory were completed, +and most of the things in the wagons were now in +place. The important thing was the disposition +of the treasure. For the safe keeping of this a +large pit was dug beneath one end of the shop, +and an underground vault constructed, the brick +for this purpose being made from a natural silicate +found in the hills near by, and which hardened +without burning. The interior was also +plastered with the same material, and a strong +door, small, but thick, was constructed to close +the opening.</p> + +<p>During the night John, the Professor and +Blakely, with the boys, carefully stored the treasure +there, so that the different tribes had no idea +of the use to which the vault had been put.</p> + +<p>Two of the simple looms had been made, so +that there were now three ready to turn out goods, +and the fiber was in such shape that it could soon +be utilized. In the meantime the boys concluded +that as the weaving process was the slowest operation +it would be well to construct several additional +looms, and two of them capable of making +goods four feet wide.</p> + +<p>One of the first acts of the Professor was to +scour the hills to the north for minerals. He was +in search of copper, and taking a half dozen of +the natives with him, and one of the teams, a +load of copper ore was brought in.</p> + +<p>The furnaces and smelters had been set up by +the boys, previous to this, and within ten days<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_76" id="p_76">p. 76</a></span> +a hundred pounds of copper were run into clay +receptacles, to be used for the various purposes.</p> + +<p>"What do you suppose the Professor wants +with so much copper?" asked Ralph.</p> + +<p>"You can make up your mind he has some +scheme or other," answered George.</p> + +<p>The Professor really did have a scheme, for +the first thing he consulted Harry about was a +plan to make some small molds in two parts, out +of brass, from a plaster paris disk which he had +carved out.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 331px;"> +<a id="illus-076" name="illus-076" /> +<a href="#p_76"> +<img src="images/illus-fig8-p076.png" width="331" height="152" +alt="Fig. 8. The One-Cent Coin" title="Fig. 8. The One-Cent Coin" /> +</a> +<span class="caption"><i>Fig. 8.</i> <span class="smcap">The One-Cent Coin</span></span> +</div> + +<p>"What is that for?" asked Harry, laughing.</p> + +<p>"That is to make one of the first coins from +our mint," he answered, smiling.</p> + +<p>A sample of the coin is shown.</p> + +<p>"What is the hole in the middle for?"</p> + +<p>"So they can be strung on a cord, and thus provide +a means for keeping them."</p> + +<p>"That is the first time I ever heard of that +plan."</p> + +<p>"It is not anything new. The Chinese adopted +the plan years ago, and Belgium is a country +which has followed the idea. It has been found<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_77" id="p_77">p. 77</a></span> +very convenient for shoppers, as they can string +them on vertical pieces of wire, and in that way +they are always kept in columns before them, and +can be readily taken off in making change."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 331px;"> +<a id="illus-077" name="illus-077" /> +<a href="#p_77"> +<img src="images/illus-fig9-p077.png" width="331" height="156" +alt="Fig. 9. The Five-Cent Coin" title="Fig. 9. The Five-Cent Coin" /> +</a> +<span class="caption"><i>Fig. 9.</i> <span class="smcap">The Five-Cent Coin</span></span> +</div> + +<p>In making the molds, the molten brass was first +poured around the paris plaster disk, so that the +metal was level with the top of the disk, and, +after it was thoroughly cooled, an additional +amount of metal was poured over this, so that +the two parts would separate. The disk was then +taken out, and two holes made on opposite sides +through the top. The copper was then poured in +one hole until it appeared at the other hole. In +this way the print formed by the disk was cast +in the coin.</p> + +<p>Harry made a half dozen of these molds, and +the mint was ready for operation. Tom and one +of the natives set to work making the coins, and +the first day cast two hundred of them. Within +a week they became quite expert at the business, +and when they took stock at the end of the week +over twenty-five hundred of the coins were in +the treasury.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_78" id="p_78">p. 78</a></span></p> + +<p>A large-sized coin was turned out, which is also +shown, the smaller being for one cent, and the +larger five cents. The stock of coins within ten +days amounted to fifty dollars in value, but it was +a good beginning.</p> + +<p>During the evening the coins were shown +around and admired, and John said: "We have +plenty of silver, when the time comes, which can +be worked up in the same way."</p> + +<p>This idea had not occurred to the boys. "But +how," asked Will, "shall we use these? The natives +won't give anything for them?"</p> + +<p>"That is what we are trying to teach them. +They are of no value except as a medium of exchange. +Money is of no value, except as it enables +us to buy something with it. When you have a +five-cent piece and a taro root before you, and +are hungry, which will you take?"</p> + +<p>"The taro root, of course."</p> + +<p>"So it isn't the coin itself, but only its value +in what you want. It is want that gives money +any value."</p> + +<p>"But I still don't see how we are going to make +the natives want the coins."</p> + +<p>"We do not intend to make them want them. +But we may soon have some things they will +need. Now it is immaterial whether they give +money for it, or if they furnish us something we +wish in exchange."</p> + +<p>"Then of what use is it to have the coins?"</p> + +<p>"Simply because we must have something to +measure by. If you buy a yard of cloth you must +have a yardstick. If you want a certain quan<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_79" id="p_79">p. 79</a></span>tity +of grain you must have a quart or a bushel +measure. Now that yard or bushel, each, is worth +so much, and they are measured by a coin or +coins, of which both know the value."</p> + +<p>"I understand now. You are simply trading a +certain marked coin for a bushel of grain, instead +of giving something else for it."</p> + +<p>"Exactly; money in itself has no value. You +cannot eat it, or make it serve as an article of +clothing, or drink it. You can only measure the +needed things with it."</p> + +<p>The practical operation of the use of coins as +money had its first trial on the following day, +when the Professor had two hundred cords prepared, +on which were strung five one-cent coins and +a five-cent coin.</p> + +<p>The warriors were told to file along the wagon, +and George handed out one of the coin sets to +each as he passed. They looked at the bright +disks curiously, at first, and were informed that +they were being rewarded for the work they had +done. This was a singular way of requiting them +for their services. They had obtained food in +plenty, and therefore this way their pay; but now, +in addition, they were being rewarded.</p> + +<p>Uraso explained the new proceeding. They +had conspicuously displayed the ramie cloth, made +in different colors, which had been woven during +the past two weeks. Not a word was said about +that. The goods displayed seemed to be of more +value than the coins. It was something they +could wear, and they envied the manner in which +the white people clothed themselves.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_80" id="p_80">p. 80</a></span></p> + +<p>John went up to Jim, who had the fiber cloth +in charge, and asked him for a piece, indicating +the length of the yardstick, which he held, and +when he was told that it was worth one of the +small coins, John made a great show of taking +one of the coins from the cord and paying for +the goods which Jim cut off.</p> + +<p>Tom did likewise, and this was very soon repeated, +some taking two yards or more. The +natives regarded this as a new species of barter, +and it did not take them long to see the peculiar +features of the transaction. Before night fully +half of the coins were again back in the hands of +the treasurer.</p> + +<p>The next day the boys, at the instigation of the +Professor, began a species of trade with the natives, +purchasing some trinket or other article, for +which coins were offered in exchange. This +spirit began to take possession of the natives. +Regularly each week the pay for work performed +was given, and as the weaving of cloth went on, +the sale of the goods began to increase.</p> + +<p>Soon the Professor called the chiefs, and said: +"We ought to send some of these men to their +homes, each week, and bring others here, so that +all may have an opportunity to work and to learn, +and also be able to buy the goods we make."</p> + +<p>There was a twofold purpose in this: The warriors +would, he knew, take their purchases home, +and thus give their families the benefits of the +cloth, and it would incite a desire for them to +again return and work for the purpose of acquiring +more goods.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_81" id="p_81">p. 81</a></span></p> + +<p>This was the first object lesson. In the following +week, the second one was quietly brought to +their attention. The workers had been fed from +the common table. It was desirable to stimulate +individual effort.</p> + +<p>For this purpose the Professor, John and +Blakely, as well as the boys, went to the different +workers, and made bargains; some offered a coin +for the bringing in of a brace of fowl; others for +a certain amount of vegetables; and some for particular +quantities of fruit and for barley.</p> + +<p>The sawmill was turning out a certain amount +of lumber, and the main house was erected, and +then began the building of a number of small +two-and three-room dwellings, all put up cheaply, +but in a substantial manner.</p> + +<p>This proceeding was looked on with wonder by +the warriors. Before long the women and children +of some of the workers appeared, and their +coming pleased the Professor immensely.</p> + +<p>It was evident that the two warring tribes were +in communication with each other, and as the affairs +of the little colony were moving along in a +very satisfactory way, it was determined to bring +them to terms. This was brought about by two incidents, +which will be related.</p> + +<p>The Brabo territory extended the farthest north +of any of the inhabited lands, and adjoined the +portion occupied by the Tuolos.</p> + +<p>In a previous book the history of John was related, +in which he described an immense cave, near +their village, occupied by the medicine men of +their tribe, and where he took refuge when pur<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_82" id="p_82">p. 82</a></span>sued. +There he discovered a large amount of +treasure. He and the boys had long wanted to +go there.</p> + +<p>When the report was brought to the new village +that the Tuolos had made a foray into the +Brabo territory, and killed several warriors, carrying +some of the women into captivity, it was +a warning that could not be disregarded.</p> + +<p>Immediately, on the heels of this news, was the +report of two runners from the Saboros that depredations +had been committed by the Illyas.</p> + +<p>The Professor called John, Blakely and the +chiefs Oma of the Brabos and Muro of the Saboros +into consultation.</p> + +<p>"We are now in condition," he said, "where we +must undertake to call those tribes to account. +The outrages reported are probably only the forerunners +of others which may be much more serious, +and I want your views on the course to follow."</p> + +<p>"It is fortunate," answered Blakely, "that the +tribes referred to are separated by the sections +of the island inhabited by our allies. This gives +us an opportunity to treat with each separately. +It seems to me that we should attack the Illyas +first, as they are the most powerful of the two."</p> + +<p>"I do not altogether agree with you," responded +John. "My view is that we should proceed against +the Tuolos, as they have committed the most serious +offense, in killing the Brabos."</p> + +<p>"You speak wisely," said Muro. "The Brabos +are not as well protected as my people."</p> + +<p>This observation, coming from Muro, was a most<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_83" id="p_83">p. 83</a></span> +pleasing one to John and the Professor, and Blakely +was instructed to muster a force of two hundred. +Notices were sent to all the allied tribes, +and within a week they arrived, all eager to engage +in the expedition.</p> + +<p>"While engaged in that work the business must +not cease here," observed the Professor. "It will +be your duty, Blakely, to thoroughly drill the men, +and instruct them in the uses of the weapons. +For reasons which you will understand, John will +accompany the expedition."</p> + +<p>During all this time there was not a day but +the Professor, as well as George, Ralph and Jim, +whenever opportunity offered, scouted about in +various directions, and brought in new specimens +of woods, flowers, vegetables, and samples of ores.</p> + +<p>The Professor's eyes were gladdened many +times at the odd parcels left on his table, that +excited the curiosity of the boys. Jim was an indefatigable +gatherer of vegetable products, and +one thing which attracted him immensely was the +branch of a tree which bore a number of star-leaved +clusters, each leaf being feather-veined, +and the stems carried numerous yellowish purple-spotted +flowers, and also nuts about the size of +pigeon eggs.</p> + +<p>"Down near the large river the banks are full +of these. Can we make any use of them?" asked +Jim.</p> + +<p>"Why that is a variety of Chica," he answered.</p> + +<p>"What is Chica, anyhow?"</p> + +<p>"The seeds are good for making burning oil. +The inner bark furnishes a fiber which resists all<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_84" id="p_84">p. 84</a></span> +moisture; and the nuts possess a substance which +is well known all over the world as mucilage. It +is recognized in commerce as gum tragacanth."</p> + +<p>"I saw different kinds there. Are they all useful?"</p> + +<p>"Some species contain nuts which are very fine, +but are never eaten raw. They must be roasted."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 347px;"> +<a id="illus-084" name="illus-084" /> +<a href="#p_84"> +<img src="images/illus-fig10-p084.png" width="347" height="287" +alt="Fig. 10. Chica. The Gum Plant." title="Fig. 10. Chica. The Gum Plant." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 10. <span class="u">Chica</span>. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Gum</span> <span class="u">Plant</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"When Jim and I were down there this morning +we saw at least a dozen different kinds of +plants growing together in a space not three feet +square. We both wondered why each kept on +growing in its own way, from the same kind of +soil. Now, don't the plants get all they are made +of from the same soil? And if that is so, why +don't they grow to be the same things?"</p> + +<p>"Of course, like the animal kingdom, the germ<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_85" id="p_85">p. 85</a></span> +of each is different, but each takes the identical +substances from the same soil, and converts them +into entirely different products. One will make +a gum; the other produces a kind of milk; others +will turn out a hard substance, like the outer portion +of the nut; some will make a vegetable good +to eat; others will yield a poison, and yet all are +from the same soil."</p> + +<p>"That is what I mean. Even though the plants +are different, why is it that one will extract one +thing and another something else?"</p> + +<p>"It is due to what is called irritability or sensitiveness +in plants. One plant is sensitive to the +flow of certain juices, and is irritated, so that it is +set into activity when different kinds of substances +are carried along the pores or deposited in the +cells. As a result, this irritation causes the plant +to take only certain ones and reject others, and its +tissues are thus built up only by such elements as +its sensitiveness selects."</p> + +<p>The training of the warriors with the new guns +was a stirring sight for the boys, who could not +help but be present during most of the time during +the two days preceding the departure for the +country of the Tuolos.</p> + +<p>Ralph and Tom begged permission to accompany +the party, and this was a natural request, +because they had been rescued from this tribe the +year before.</p> + +<p>It thus happened that the party of warriors, +equipped as they had never been before, left the +village, with one of the wagons, which was loaded +with provisions and ammunition, and the boys +took charge of the team.</p> + + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_86" id="p_86">p. 86</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h2> + +<h3>THE EXPEDITION AGAINST THE TUOLOS</h3> + + +<p>It was decided to go north until they reached +the level country, which would afford easy travel, +and then move to the west and cross the large +river which separated the Brabos from the Tuolos, +as it would be better to meet them on the extreme +western side of the ridge which they occupied.</p> + +<p>"Do you remember, Blakely, what kind of country +is to be found directly west of their principal +village?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"I have been over that entire country," responded +Blakely.</p> + +<p>"When I recovered, the morning of the wreck, +I went inland at once," remarked John, "and I +never saw the sea again. When you related your +story about seeing a certain tribe offering up +victims you must have been on the western side +of the village."</p> + +<p>"Yes; I came up from the sea."</p> + +<p>"Well, you see I came down there directly from +the north, and I reached the village on the eastern +side, and I saw the sacrifice of the captives at the +same time you did, but on the opposite side of the +village."</p> + +<p>"That is very probable. On the western side +the country is high, but not difficult to travel +across."</p> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em;"> +<a id="illus-095" name="illus-095" /> +<a href="#p_86"> +<img src="images/illus-p095.jpg" width="400" height="613" +alt="The act was such a startling one that they threw themselves on the ground in terror" +title="The act was such a startling one that they threw themselves on the ground in terror" /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">"<i>The act was such a startling one that they threw themselves on the ground in terror</i>"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_95">See p. 95</a>]</p> +</div> + +<p>"That is the exact point I am aiming at. I +know that all the way down, from the place where<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_87" id="p_87">p. 87</a></span> +I struck into the interior, it would be almost impassable +for the wagon."</p> + +<p>This settled the route to be taken, and they +moved westwardly, after crossing the river, and +before night the boys caught the first glimpse of +the broad ocean.</p> + +<p>In the morning they put out scouts, which went +well in advance of the column, and Muro was in +charge of them. His instinct as a trailer was inimitable.</p> + +<p>Before evening of the second day the scouts +announced the first signs of the Tuolos. The village +could be reached within two hours' march, +but John advised waiting for the following morning +before approaching.</p> + +<p>During the early evening, however, Muro returned +on a hurried trip from the front. "They +are having a great feast at the village, and it appears +that they will make sacrifices to-night, or to-morrow, +so that we should approach as close as +possible, and if we find that is their intention, prevent +it."</p> + +<p>This news stirred all into activity. The column +went forward with the utmost caution, although +it was dark, and the wagon had to be guided along +with great care.</p> + +<p>The movement proceeded until nine o'clock, and +during the night march Muro had arranged a constant +line of communication with John, through +his runners. A festival was in progress, and the +two victims were plainly seen by John when he +and Muro went through the grass and inspected +the village.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_88" id="p_88">p. 88</a></span></p> + +<p>The inaction of the whites had entirely disarmed +the Tuolos. Indeed, as afterwards learned, +they began to think that fear prevented an attack +on their village, and no sentinels were posted +to warn them of any approaching foe.</p> + +<p>While waiting for the return of John and Muro, +Ralph and Tom also wandered around the section +surrounding the camp. They were in a valley, +on both sides of which were ridges running north +and south. The moon came out before ten o'clock, +and they remembered some of the scenes about +them. They had been brought from the south +through this identical valley when they were captured +by the Tuolos.</p> + +<p>They were on the hillside, not five hundred feet +from their camp, and were about to descend the +hill, when Ralph started back, and grasped Tom's +arm.</p> + +<p>"What is that dark object directly ahead?"</p> + +<p>The dark object was an opening into the hill, +but as it was by the side of a projecting rock, it +had the appearance of an object. They looked at +each other for a moment in silence.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if this is another cave, or the one +John spoke about?" asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"No, that is on the east side of the village. We +are below the village. Do you think we had better +make an investigation?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but I wish John was here. Come on; we +have plenty of help here if we need it."</p> + +<p>The opening was approached as noiselessly as +possible. It showed a typical cave entrance, +through solid rock, or, rather, through what ap<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_89" id="p_89">p. 89</a></span>peared +to be a cleavage which had been spread +apart. They had no light of any kind, but the +discovery was one which interested them, because +they knew of the treasure caves existing on the +island, and two of them, at least, were within +their knowledge, and contained immense hoards.</p> + +<p>"Can you strike a match, so we can get some +idea of it?" asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"I am going to try it at any rate." So saying, +the match was lighted, and its beams penetrated +the interior. In their eagerness the match was +muffled, and went out, but they caught sight of +a huge white cross, far beyond, and it seemed to +be moving.</p> + +<p>"Did you notice that?" asked Tom excitedly.</p> + +<p>"Do you mean the cross?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"It seemed to move up and down."</p> + +<p>"I thought so, too."</p> + +<p>"I don't care about going any farther without +we have some one with us and can have a decent +light."</p> + +<p>The boys hurried to the camp, and waited for +John. When he came they hurriedly related the +experience.</p> + +<p>"That will do to investigate."</p> + +<p>"We saw a cross in there, moving up and down."</p> + +<p>"Have we any of the candles with us?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Possibly; I can soon tell."</p> + +<p>Tom came back with the news that he had found +a box of them.</p> + +<p>"As the village is quieting down, we shall have +plenty of time to make the examination to-night.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_90" id="p_90">p. 90</a></span> +We must wait until Muro returns, so as to get the +latest news, and can then start out."</p> + +<p>Muro returned shortly after, and together with +the boys, went up the hill, and entered the +mouth of the cavern. Three candles were lighted. +The great cross was before them, but it was such +a different thing, now that they were face to face +with it. The end of the chamber, which the light +penetrated, had four openings to the chambers +beyond, two above and two below. These openings +were separated from each other, and the white +walls between the openings appeared to form the +white cross.</p> + +<p>It was wonderfully realistic, this fanciful and +fantastical carving of nature through the rocky +structure.</p> + +<p>"But I saw it move; that is sure," said Tom.</p> + +<p>"Did you see that move, or was it the light of +the match that moved?" asked John. "Imagination +plays many a trick, during the excitement of +the moment."</p> + +<p>John took the light, and by moving it up and +down showed how the beams, shining past the +glistening walls, would cause the illusion of the +cross moving.</p> + +<p>The cavern was found to be much broken up +as they advanced, and reaching the second set of +chambers, it was evident that some one had lately +occupied it. Penetrating farther into the interior, +they were surprised to see articles of savage +clothing, and long reeds, that had been burned +at the ends, together with utensils for cooking.</p> + +<p>"We have entered one of the homes of the medi<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_91" id="p_91">p. 91</a></span>cine +men of the Tuolos. I have no doubt they are +now at the village attending the festivals, and we +had better leave as quickly as possible."</p> + +<p>Before the entrance was reached they heard a +great commotion outside, and their own people +rushing to and fro, and as they were emerging +three fantastically garbed natives met them. John +ordered them to halt in the native tongue, and they +stood there irresolute. The boys also leveled their +guns at them, and they submitted as Muro and his +men rushed up.</p> + +<p>The appearance of John and the boys startled +Muro beyond expression, as the latter said: "These +are the medicine men of the tribe."</p> + +<p>"I knew it," responded John. "We have just +been investigating the place they live," and he +pointed to the mouth of the cavern.</p> + +<p>These were the men who performed the sacred +rites of the Tuolos, and were called the Krishnos, +as they learned from Muro.</p> + +<p>"Take them to the camp," ordered John.</p> + +<p>Without more ado, they were hustled down to +the wagon. It seems that when the Krishnos returned +from the village they found themselves in +the immediate vicinity of the camp, and in the effort +to escape aroused the sentries, who rushed +upon them.</p> + +<p>If they could have reached the cave, not one of +the warriors would have dared to enter it, as their +superstitious fears would have prevented them, +but outside the cave they had no such feelings. +It was fortunate, therefore, that John and the +boys were there to prevent them from entering.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_92" id="p_92">p. 92</a></span></p> + +<p>As they were going down the hill, John exhibited +a curious cross, He had found it in the cave, +just before he advised the boys to go out. It was +made of stone, and one of the limbs had a hole +near its end, which indicated that it had been +carried as a charm.</p> + +<p>"Isn't that singular? Why should the natives +have the Christian sign of the cross?"</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 337px;"> +<a id="illus-092" name="illus-092" /> +<a href="#p_92"> +<img src="images/illus-fig11-p092.png" width="337" height="184" +alt="Fig. 11. Stone Cross found in Cave." title="Fig. 11. Stone Cross found in Cave." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 11. <span class="u">Stone</span> <span class="u">Cross</span> <span class="u">found</span> <span class="u">in</span> <span class="u">Cave</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"That is one of the earliest symbols that the +world knows. Its use goes back beyond the earliest +period of history. It was the favorite figure +used by the astronomers and astrologers of the +ancient Babylonians, fully four or five thousand +years ago. The clay tablets and stone monuments +of the Persians contained them; the Hittites, in +the earliest Jewish times, used them; and the ancient +Egyptians decorated the High Priests officiating +in the temples with figures of the cross."</p> + +<p>"It seems to me that if it was used by peoples +in different parts of the earth, there must have +been some reason for it."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_93" id="p_93">p. 93</a></span></p> + +<p>"One of the well-known forms found in the inscriptions +shows the cross within a circle. This +seems to be the meaning of the phrase in Isaiah +which says the 'four ends of the earth.' In Bible +times the earth was known to be round, so that +the expression used in the Bible about the 'circle +of the earth,' and the four ends, seem to point +clearly to the cross within the circle, to indicate +the four points of the compass."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 349px;"> +<a id="illus-093" name="illus-093" /> +<a href="#p_93"> +<img src="images/illus-fig12-p093.png" width="349" height="209" +alt="Fig. 12. Ancient Crosses." title="Fig. 12. Ancient Crosses." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 12. <span class="u">Ancient</span> <span class="u">Crosses</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"So the Christians took an old form and made +it their symbol?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; the Roman cross, used at the crucifixion, +had the lower stem longer than the other, and +from this fact that form became the Cross of +Christianity."</p> + +<p>The uproar created by the pursuit attracted the +attention of the warriors in the village, who ran +to and fro, and soon learned the cause of the +disturbance.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_94" id="p_94">p. 94</a></span></p> + +<p>The camp was kept quiet, however, but the +scouts watched the excitement created, and reported +the results at frequent intervals. Muro knew +they would not desert the village, as they would +not be likely to leave it at the mercy of their +enemies, at least without a fight.</p> + +<p>John confronted the medicine men as soon as +the wagon was reached.</p> + +<p>"Why do your people make war, and refuse to +treat with us?"</p> + +<p>"Because you have no right to come and try to +kill us."</p> + +<p>"Why did you imprison our people, and offer up +some of them as a sacrifice?"</p> + +<p>"Because your people fought us."</p> + +<p>"You lie; you took those who were defenseless, +and had no weapons. You do not tell the truth."</p> + +<p>"The Great Spirit told us to kill you."</p> + +<p>"Why do you try to lie to me. I do not believe +you. The Great Spirit never told you so. He +would not speak to you."</p> + +<p>"The white man does not know. He speaks to +us."</p> + +<p>"Where does he speak to you?"</p> + +<p>"In the sacred cave."</p> + +<p>"How does he tell you?"</p> + +<p>"With wonderful signs."</p> + +<p>"Tell me some of the wonderful signs."</p> + +<p>"He makes a great light, and we read it in the +light. He makes a great noise, and we know what +he says."</p> + +<p>"Does he make a great light and a great noise +up there?" and John pointed up to the heavens.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_95" id="p_95">p. 95</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Then why did you lie to me when you said that +he speaks to you in the cave?"</p> + +<p>"We can understand it only in the cave."</p> + +<p>While they were thus speaking John held the +stone cross in his hand, and the Krishnos eyed +him curiously. He finally saw the movement, and, +quick as a flash, he reached down in his pocket, +unobserved by them, and drew forth one of the +wooden matches, which they had made at the Cataract.</p> + +<p>"What is this?" he asked sternly, pointing to +the cross.</p> + +<p>They raised their hands and rolled their eyes +upwardly, as though about to pronounce a malediction +on John. He deftly drew the match along +the rear side of the stone, and as it blazed forth +into light, he thrust it forward into their faces.</p> + +<p>The act was such a startling one that they threw +themselves on the ground in terror.</p> + +<p>"The Great Spirit told me that you lied, and he +is about to come out of the stone and consume +you. He will follow you everywhere unless you +go to the Tuolos at once and tell them that the +Great Spirit has told you to give up the captives, +and to never again kill any of them. You must tell +them we have been sent to make them our friends, +and that if they do not follow this advice we will +punish them."</p> + +<p>The Krishnos cringed before John. It was obvious +to the surrounding warriors that the words +they had heard had an ominous import, and they +saw how feeble were the devices of the so-called<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_96" id="p_96">p. 96</a></span> +wise men when pitted against the knowledge of +John.</p> + +<p>John assumed a most tragic attitude, as he +slowly raised his arm and pointed with his finger +to the savage village. "Go," he said, "and bring +back to me the answer before the morning sun +comes up."</p> + +<p>They hesitated. "Do you fear to go? Are the +wise men cowards? Did the Great Spirit tell you +to fear the Tuolos? Shall we go and sacrifice all +your people?"</p> + +<p>"They will not believe us; they will kill us."</p> + +<p>"Then they, too, know you have lied to them. +If you remain here you will not be safe, because +the great light might destroy you."</p> + +<p>Then turning to Muro he said: "Take these men +to their village, and see that they are forced to +meet their chiefs," and with an imperious air he +turned from them.</p> + +<p>Muro's warriors were not too gentle with them. +The spell of savage witchcraft had been broken. +John and all of them knew it. They were hustled +forward in the darkness, and as they approached +the village Muro told them to advise the chiefs in +his presence what John had said.</p> + +<p>Muro and the warriors, with the loaded guns, +remained at a safe distance, and the Krishnos entered +the village. They waited in silence for more +than an hour, and then a commotion was noticed, +which grew more intense as the voices increased +in volume.</p> + +<p>In the meantime John with the rest of the warriors +came up quietly in the rear, and, after con<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_97" id="p_97">p. 97</a></span>sulting +with Blakely and Muro, the village was surrounded.</p> + +<p>The boys saw the large hut where they were confined, +after being captured, and from which they +were rescued. Calling John's attention to it, +Ralph said: "That big house is the place they kept +us, and that is where you found us."</p> + +<p>John looked at them in surprise. He did not +know this, as at the time the boys were rescued he +was in mental darkness, and did not recall the incident.</p> + +<p>It was obvious that some tragedy was being enacted. +While awaiting the result of the conference +Muro was away instructing the pickets who +were around the village. He soon appeared, bringing +with him two Tuolos whose dress betokened +them as belonging to the same order as the individuals +who had been sent into the village.</p> + +<p>Calling John aside he said:</p> + +<p>"The Tuolos have two rival sets of medicine +men. These belong to the other set, and are the +ones who perform the religious rites."</p> + +<p>"Where did you find them?"</p> + +<p>"Directly east of the village."</p> + +<p>"Were they going to the village?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Did they come from the hill on the east side?"</p> + +<p>John mused for a while, and then said quietly +to Muro: "They came from a cave on the hill, +where they perform their rites, and it is a place I +want to see. It is one of the reasons I insisted on +coming to settle matters first with the Tuolos."</p> + +<p>Muro was astounded at the information, as he<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_98" id="p_98">p. 98</a></span> +asked: "How do you know there is a cave in the +hill?"</p> + +<p>"Because I have been in it, and I know what it +contains. They are having trouble in the village +with the Krishnos we sent there."</p> + +<p>"Yes," responded Muro; "and they have sent for +the others, as they do not believe what they have +told the chiefs."</p> + +<p>"I will question the ones you have brought in."</p> + +<p>The two captured were brought before John. +They stood before him in defiant attitude, and +some of the Brabo warriors cringed at their frowning +mien.</p> + +<p>"Why were you going to the village?" he asked +with a severe frown.</p> + +<p>At this question they scarcely deigned to move +their heads, and were silent. The question was +repeated, but they refused to answer. This was +carrying out the very line of conduct which Muro +had advised John would be the case, and in concert +they had mapped out a course of action.</p> + +<p>"Tell me, Muro, have any of your people the +same fear of these Krishnos as the others possess +in the various tribes?"</p> + +<p>"It is the universal belief in the various tribes +that to offend them means death. The only ones +who are supreme are the chiefs, who often imprison +them, but even the chiefs dare not kill +them."</p> + +<p>"Will your people carry out our command if +we do not order them killed?"</p> + +<p>"My people will do whatever I say, even though +it be to kill them. They saw how the other Krish<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_99" id="p_99">p. 99</a></span>nos +quaked when you made the fire come out of +the stone."</p> + +<p>"Then, if they refuse to answer me, I will order +them to be beaten. You will understand."</p> + +<p>"That will be done with pleasure," he answered.</p> + +<p>It was obvious to all that the Krishnos considered +themselves immune from the threats of John, +as they stood there and seemed to breathe imprecations +on the heads of their captors.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_100" id="p_100">p. 100</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h2> + +<h3>THE SUBMISSION OF THE TUOLOS</h3> + + +<p>The situation was a tense one to the entire +party, and John moved forward, placing himself +directly in front of them.</p> + +<p>"Do you think the Great Spirit can prevent us +from punishing you? If you do not answer immediately +I will call on him to lay stripes on you. Do +you answer?"</p> + +<p>He stepped back slowly, and then suddenly +spoke out the warning signal that he had arranged +with Muro, and instantly six of the most powerful +Saboros sprang upon them and bound them together +face to face. John stood there with arms +folded. He raised a hand, and two of the warriors +raised the supple and toughened twigs, and +brought them down on their bare backs.</p> + +<p>It was all done with such wonderful celerity and +precision that it astounded the circle of warriors +beyond measure, and the effect was doubly so to +the two Krishnos. John had staged this to produce +the greatest effect. The Krishnos were bound +with their heads side by side, and a cloth put over +their heads, so that they had no knowledge who +their tormentors were.</p> + +<p>They danced about, and in their shrieks called +out imprecations on their enemies, but soon, as the +blows continued, begged for mercy, and Muro signaled +them to cease.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_101" id="p_101">p. 101</a></span></p> + +<p>The cloth was removed and John again addressed +them. They again persevered in their +silence, and at a motion the cloth was again placed +over their heads.</p> + +<p>Before the second chastisement began they +yielded and the cords were released.</p> + +<p>"You see the Great Spirit did not come to your +assistance. Why were you going to the village?"</p> + +<p>"To tell the chiefs not to yield to you."</p> + +<p>"The Great Spirit has told me to tell you that +the Tuolos must give up their captives, and cease +war. Will you tell the chief so?"</p> + +<p>"The Great Spirit did not tell you so," they defiantly +answered.</p> + +<p>At a signal from John the cords were again +brought into play, and the cloth exhibited. At this +sight they pleaded for mercy, and promised to do +as John requested. They were released and conducted +to the outer line of pickets, and quickly +disappeared within the village.</p> + +<p>It was now nearly four in the morning, and the +first streaks of light began to show in the east. +Muro knew the Tuolo character. They regarded +themselves to be the superiors of all the tribes, +and hitherto had treated the others with contempt, +excepting the Illyas, whom they respected only +because they were the most powerful.</p> + +<p>"They are having a warm time discussing the +situation," remarked John, as he noted the surging +inhabitants. That there was indecision became +apparent, and the condition of the Krishnos +more precarious, as light began to give them a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_102" id="p_102">p. 102</a></span> +more decided glimpse of the activities in the village.</p> + +<p>Soon warriors were noticed rushing to and from +the large circle within which the Krishnos sat. +Bows and spears were hurriedly grasped.</p> + +<p>"What does it mean?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"It is likely they know they are surrounded, +and have decided to defend themselves," answered +Muro.</p> + +<p>A warrior of distinguished appearance emerged +from the circle, and advanced toward the position +occupied by John. Muro beckoned to John, and +together they moved into the open. The warrior +saw the two approaching, and he halted.</p> + +<p>Turning to his band he spoke a word, and another +no less distinguished stepped from the rank +and moved toward him.</p> + +<p>"The first one is the chief, and the other one he +called to follow is the next in rank. As there are +two of us, so must there be two on his side."</p> + +<p>John and Muro advanced without halting, and +as they neared each other the chief, in the most +haughty manner, addressed Muro as follows:</p> + +<p>"Why do you come to make war on my people?"</p> + +<p>Muro, taking his cue from John's previous attitude, +rose to his full height and replied: "You have +always been the aggressor against the other people, +and you have within the last moon killed and +taken two Brabos in captivity, and we demand +their return."</p> + +<p>"That I will not do."</p> + +<p>"Then the White Chief will speak to you."</p> + +<p>John advanced and began the conversation.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_103" id="p_103">p. 103</a></span> +"The white people do not desire war. You captured +two of my people and I took them from you +with only four men. All the tribes but you and +the Illyas have united to compel you to submit, +and you shall not again be free to murder and injure +other people.</p> + +<p>"If you want war, we are prepared to fight you. +Your village is surrounded, and we have the fire +guns which will compel you to yield. If you will +surrender, we will see to it that you and your +people shall not be harmed, but if you resist you +will be killed. You cannot escape."</p> + +<p>The chief was stunned, and could not answer. +John saw the impression the address had made, +and proceeded: "What did the Krishnos tell you? +Did they not tell you to surrender? Did they not +tell you that they lied when they said the Great +Spirit wanted you to kill us?"</p> + +<p>The chief was silent. Was he debating the +matter in his mind? John continued: "When this +speaks," he said, pointing to his gun, "all of the +fire guns about your village will speak."</p> + +<p>"How shall we know you will keep your word?"</p> + +<p>Muro held up his hand, as he spoke: "Ask the +Kurabus whether the White Chief keeps his word."</p> + +<p>Before he could reply, John added: "The White +Chief keeps his word. He believes the people +here will keep their word if they know the others +will do so. He has armed the tribes who have +allied themselves with him, because he believes in +them, and we do not want to make you captives, +or offer sacrifices of your brave men."</p> + +<p>"The White Chief speaks wisely," said Muro.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_104" id="p_104">p. 104</a></span> +"He does not believe in making sacrifices. The +Great Spirit has told him that is wrong."</p> + +<p>Still the chief pondered, and, slowly raising his +head, said: "I believe the white man, and what he +says. I will tell my people."</p> + +<p>He turned and moved toward the village, John +and Muro remaining there, as an indication that +they expected an immediate answer.</p> + +<p>"He will yield," said Muro, "and according to +custom, will first tell his people what his decision +is."</p> + +<p>Muro was right. Within a half hour the chief +advanced at the head of his warriors, the latter +of whom had left their bows and spears at the +circle, and the two stood ready to receive them.</p> + +<p>As the two chiefs appeared the warriors lined +up behind them.</p> + +<p>"I have brought my warriors here to show you +that we will be friends." And John advanced and +took the hand of the chief.</p> + +<p>"In my country we become friends when we take +each other's hands, and I am glad to see that you +have wisdom to accept us as your friends."</p> + +<p>At a signal from Muro, the warriors advanced +from all sides, and together they marched into the +village, the different ones telling the Tuolos the +wonderful things the White Chief was doing, and +how they were bringing all the tribes together, +and making them stop war.</p> + +<p>The first act of the Tuolo chief was to liberate +the two Brabo warriors. When the wagon was +driven into the village, the people gathered around +the curious contrivance. Some of them remem<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_105" id="p_105">p. 105</a></span>bered +it when it was there nearly a year before, +but under quite different circumstances.</p> + +<p>The boys, Ralph and Tom, soon attracted the +attention of the chief. He went up to them, and +simulating the act of John, held out his hand. +The boys understood it, and respectfully responded +and saluted the chief, in regular military fashion.</p> + +<p>Then, climax to the foregoing events, Blakely +gave a word of command to the fifty who were +armed with the guns, and for the benefit of their +new allies, put them through a manual of arms. +The precision with which this was done, and the +remarkable manner in which the subsequent evolutions +were performed, astonished the Tuolos.</p> + +<p>While this was going on there was little time +to notice the condition of the Krishnos. They had +been bound; and were now lying in disgrace at the +place where the circle had been formed, trembling +at their fate.</p> + +<p>Before preparations had been made for breakfast, +the chief gave a command, and a number of +warriors rushed up to the poor fellows, and began +to drag them to the large hut.</p> + +<p>Muro motioned to John, and quietly said: "They +will probably torture them."</p> + +<p>John appeared before the chief and said: "The +Great Spirit will be offended if you injure the +Krishnos."</p> + +<p>"What would you have me do with them?"</p> + +<p>"Give them to me."</p> + +<p>The chief ordered them to be brought forward, +and spoke to them: "The White Chief has asked<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_106" id="p_106">p. 106</a></span> +me not to injure you, and at his command I have +given you to him."</p> + +<p>This announcement seemed to stun them, but +Muro was quick to assure them that the White +Chief meant no harm.</p> + +<p>The boys took complete satisfaction in going +over to the large hut, to again witness the place +where they had spent two weeks in terror, expecting +that each day would be their last.</p> + +<p>But we must return to the Professor and the +colony. Two days after the departure of John +and his force, the second insulting message came +from the Illyas, in which the statement was made +that they and the Tuolos had united to drive the +White Chief from the country and to destroy the +tribes who were allied against them.</p> + +<p>A messenger was sent after John, but this was +not necessary, as the Tuolos were in their power +before the messenger came.</p> + +<p>The Professor had ordered the building of a +number of small houses, each containing two or +three rooms, and these were plainly fitted up for +comfort. Some of the natives became quite expert +at putting up these structures when once directed.</p> + +<p>George and Jim were set to work, with a half +dozen of the men, at building chairs and tables +for the houses, and the work of weaving the cloth +goods was not interrupted for a moment. As +stated, the women began to drift in, and the Professor +welcomed them. When they arrived, many +of them with their children, the Professor assigned +them and their husbands to these cottages.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_107" id="p_107">p. 107</a></span></p> + +<p>This was an intense delight to them. Each cottage +had a small patch of ground surrounding it, +and the first care was to advise them how to lay +off and plant flowers about the place, to make the +surroundings attractive.</p> + +<p>It must not be thought that the houses were +gifts. It was not the purpose to instill the idea +that this work was one of charity. Instead each +head of a family was made to understand that he +must pay for the home, and this was done in +as simple a manner as possible, so it would be +appreciated and understood.</p> + +<p>Individual effort was stimulated on the part of +the different workers. As fast as the members of +a worker's family arrived, they were installed in +houses, and then began a new system of providing +for their keep. Hitherto, they had boarded +at the expense of the common fund; but now this +was gradually changed, and they were informed +that each family must provide its own food, and +that those who did so would receive a larger number +of coins.</p> + +<p>This resulted in each one trying to find some +new direction in which they could get the coins. +It is curious how this new phase of living brought +out traits common to humanity everywhere. Some +more eager than others, and having less honesty +than the common run of natives, sought to get their +sustenance by resorting to trickery and thievery.</p> + +<p>In their native state this was not considered a +crime. It was commendable, unless detected. But +by constant talk, on the part of the Professor, and +by example, he instilled into the policemen, which<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_108" id="p_108">p. 108</a></span> +he had installed, the principles of honesty. He +awarded those who were vigilant, and the result +was that they were most acute to detect the rogues.</p> + +<p>The first thief was caught the day after John's +party had gone. He was immediately brought before +the Professor. The arrest of a thief was +such a new proceeding that the workers could +not be kept at work, and the Professor suggested +that they should all be present at the trial.</p> + +<p>The inquiry was conducted with decorum, Harry +being appointed to prosecute him, and George +to defend the prisoner. George did it vigorously, +too, but it was a plain and palpable case, and he +was found guilty. This proceeding was another +entirely new manner of treating an offender, and +the people marveled at the attempt to defend the +thief.</p> + +<p>The Professor saw the cause of the wonderment, +and said: "We do not defend the wrong, +but we believe that each man who is charged with +a crime should be permitted to defend himself. +If he does not know how to properly defend himself, +then it is our duty to see that he is protected +in all his rights, for he is not a criminal until it is +proven."</p> + +<p>"He has tried to explain why he took the goods, +but you know what he has said was not true, and +he must be punished for it. He must work two +moons without getting any of the coins, and if he +repeats the crime, he must work until he restores +the value of the goods taken, so that each one will +know that a thief cannot take things from another +without paying for it."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_109" id="p_109">p. 109</a></span></p> + +<p>The incident for a long time deterred anyone +from repeating the offense. It was an object lesson, +because it instilled a respect for a law which +was fair to all.</p> + +<p>Suros, the chief of the Berees, was the most impressed +by the scene, and could not express himself +too forcibly at the wonderful effect which the +principle would have on the tribes in their dealings +with each other. He was really an intelligent +native, far ahead of the others in his comprehension +of the duties of one to the other.</p> + +<p>The fact that he was regarded with reverence by +all but the Kurabus, and was even respected by +them, was a strong factor in determining the Professor +to set in motion a form of government which +it was hoped would forever terminate all bitterness +of feeling between the tribes, and which will +be detailed hereafter.</p> + +<p>During the day on which the Tuolos submitted, +the two chiefs, together with John, Blakely and +Muro, were frequently in consultation.</p> + +<p>"The Great White Chief, who rules all of us, +wishes to see you, and you must bring fifty of +your warriors with you to his village," said John. +"He will show you how you can be made strong, +and your people happy. He will tell you what our +purpose is, and what the Great Spirit asks you +to do. We will start in the morning."</p> + +<p>The chief, to the surprise of all, did not demur +at this. That night John called in Blakely, Muro, +Ralph and Tom.</p> + +<p>"I want you to go with me to the cave on the hill +to the east. There are some things which belong<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_110" id="p_110">p. 110</a></span> +to us. We shall take them, since they are of no +use to the people here, and we may be able to put +some of the things in such a condition that they +will be of value to the people on the island."</p> + +<p>The wagon was taken along, and the people +wondered at the strange proceedings. Many of +them followed, but Muro warned them to remain +behind. It was evident to all, however, that they +were going to the Krishno cave, and its purport +was a mystery to them.</p> + +<p>John's sense of direction did not deceive him. +He soon found the entrance on the village side, +and, lighting the candles, immediately entered the +cavern. John led the way, as his experience in +its hollows enabled him to point out the direction +to be taken.</p> + +<p>The interior, lighted up by the candles, was most +weird and beautiful. The stalactite hangings were +not massive, but showed the most delicate tracings, +in the first chamber reached. This was the western +wing of the great interior cross which John had +previously described.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_111" id="p_111">p. 111</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h2> + +<h3>PLANS FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE NATIVES</h3> + + +<p>Directly beyond this chamber, and on a line +with the entrance passage, was an extension which +led to the other side of the hill. The chamber +formed an immense cross, in its plan section, and +the two lateral extremities were the points of interest.</p> + +<p>The party first went to the left, and there found +the habitation of the Krishnos. Peculiar implements +and instruments were discovered, and all +of these were taken, and placed together, Muro +and the boys looking on in wonder.</p> + +<p>Among them were found a number of crude +crosses and numerous charms or amulets, the kind +that they vended, and which the natives gave their +souls and bodies to acquire.</p> + +<p>"The possession of these will be of great service +to us, as the people reverence them, and we must +not expect to change their beliefs in a fortnight."</p> + +<p>"You said there was a lot of treasure here," remarked +Ralph.</p> + +<p>"That is in the other wing of the chamber. As +we have everything from this place that is serviceable, +we will go to the south wing."</p> + +<p>The recessed part of the chamber at this place +had the appearance of being carved from the rock, +and decorated with the universal calcium. The +floor was covered with stalagmites, rough and un<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_112" id="p_112">p. 112</a></span>even, +showing that the place had not been trod, +perhaps for centuries.</p> + +<p>"What are those curious things?" asked Tom, +gazing at the square-shaped objects, which were +arranged in one corner.</p> + +<p>"By opening them we shall see."</p> + +<p>"Here is one, partly opened," exclaimed Ralph +in great excitement.</p> + +<p>"Yes; that is the one I tried to get into," answered +John. "Notwithstanding it was a hazardous +thing to do at the time, I took the risk. The +Krishnos were at that very time at the other wing +which we just left."</p> + +<p>The receptacle was brought out and examined. +The wealth of gold and silver was amazing. Blakely +could hardly believe the testimony of his eyes.</p> + +<p>"Your ship, the <i>Adventurer</i>, is floating around +in pieces on the Pacific, but I imagine there is +enough here to compensate you for the loss of the +vessel," remarked John, as he noticed Blakely's +wondering look.</p> + +<p>"How can we ever get all this stuff on the +wagon?" asked Tom. "The boxes are all falling +to pieces."</p> + +<p>"The Krishnos have plenty of copper vessels, as +well as others, which they have gathered up from +the wrecks on the coast. You know the best of +everything goes to them, and the chiefs are not +strong enough really to prevent them on account +of the superstitious fears they inculcate."</p> + +<p>True enough, the eastern wing had a hoard of +vessels, some of them of the greatest value, which +were arranged about the chests of treasure, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_113" id="p_113">p. 113</a></span> +the work of filling the receptacles was industriously +undertaken. This occupied them for fully three +hours, and the greater task of carrying them to +the wagon was begun.</p> + +<p>When they emerged from the cave at four in +the morning they were tired beyond all description, +but they had a mass of treasure, that did not +pale in comparison with the amount taken out of +the caverns near the Cataract.</p> + +<p>In the morning the Tuolos were selected, and +the chief invited to enter the wagon. John went +to the large hut, and released the Krishnos. They +were unbound, and directed to follow the marching +column, surprised at being free from the captive +bonds. They could not understand such treatment, +and this was heightened when John ordered the +aged Krishno, who walked with difficulty, to take +a place in the wagon.</p> + +<p>The natives saw the warriors and their chief +depart, not as prisoners, since all had their weapons, +but conducted in state, if the appearance of +the chief in the vehicle was an indication of the proceeding.</p> + +<p>Two days thereafter the cavalcade approached +the village, and the chief strained his eyes, as he +peered at the multitude about him, and saw a village +of a most remarkable character, where two +moons before was a virgin tract of land.</p> + +<p>The venerable appearance of the Professor attracted +him. He was startled at the sight of +Suros, and then, glancing about, he recognized +Oma of the Brabos, Uraso of the Osagas, and +lastly, Tastoa, chief of the Kurabus, lately his ally.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_114" id="p_114">p. 114</a></span></p> + +<p>The Professor welcomed him with outstretched +hand. "You are wondering at the sight of your +late enemies, and of your friends. We have nothing +but friends here. They can tell you that we +welcome you as a friend, and will explain why +we do so. We will show you what the people are +doing for themselves, and how happily they live, +and the White Chief brought you here so that you +might see these things for yourself."</p> + +<p>"We welcome you, Marmo, as one of our +friends," said Suros. "I tried many moons ago to +tell you that the Great Spirit did not want us to +kill each other, but the wise men told you differently. +We do not believe them any more, but listen +to the White Chief."</p> + +<p>"He has told us the most wonderful things, and +taught us how the white men live, and how different +tribes live together in peace."</p> + +<p>After the welcoming functions and the explanations +were concluded, he was taken to the different +works, and everything explained to him. He +saw the water wheel, and how it turned the sawmill +and the grindstone and lathes, and the mill +for making the flour.</p> + +<p>The looms interested him the most of all. It is +singular how the various tools and machinery +affected the different ones, and this was particularly +observed by the boys.</p> + +<p>"I have watched the several tribes," said Harry, +"as they first looked about them at the strange +things, and it is curious how the different things +impress them. I have noticed that the Osagas are +particularly interested in machinery. The Saboros<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_115" id="p_115">p. 115</a></span> +like anything connected with the soil, and they +would make good agriculturists."</p> + +<p>"Don't you remember when Uraso came to the +Cataract he never took any stock in the guns, but +Stut couldn't keep his hands off them?" responded +Tom.</p> + +<p>"The old chief Marmo thought the loom was the +finest thing in the whole lot. He is over there +now, and has been watching it for the last two +hours."</p> + +<p>For two days the chief wandered around, paying +no attention to anything but the machinery, +and the products turned out. The coins were a +novelty, and a string was presented to him. He +noticed the friendly attitude of all the warriors +to his men, and marveled at the change.</p> + +<p>He could not understand why the men would +work for the coins, and then give them up for +something else. The Professor tried to explain +this, and it must be confessed that it was a hard +thing to do. It seemed that nothing but a practical +application would make it plain.</p> + +<p>The Tuolo chief was a ready listener now, and +was unusually quick to grasp a situation, although +he could not learn the ethics of the white man. +The Professor had him present at one of the trials +for theft of a petty nature, which occurred a few +days after his arrival.</p> + +<p>He was surprised to find that any notice should +be taken of such a trivial affair. The Professor, +commenting on it at the trial, which he did particularly +for the benefit of Marmo, said: "It is not the +amount of the theft, but the act itself, which we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_116" id="p_116">p. 116</a></span> +must condemn. If you could have taken a larger +amount you would have done so, and you must +learn that the property you took did not belong +to you but the some one else, and that is just as +much a crime as though you took all the man possessed."</p> + +<p>That was sufficient for his first lesson in justice. +"But," he asked of the Professor, "can all +men be guilty of doing wrong?"</p> + +<p>"Can you do wrong?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"But you are a Great Chief, and how can you +do wrong in taking things from your people?"</p> + +<p>"Because the people own the things, just as +much as you own the things which you have properly +obtained."</p> + +<p>"Then if you do wrong, will you be punished?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; just the same as the people who do +wrong. My punishment should be greater, if I +do wrong, because I should set them an example +to do right."</p> + +<p>"But how can I do wrong if I take anything +from my people? I own everything."</p> + +<p>"Who gave everything to you? By what right +should you or I own everything? Because we are +chiefs does not give us the right to own everything."</p> + +<p>"Then how can the chiefs ever own anything?"'</p> + +<p>"They should work for it like everyone else +does."</p> + +<p>"Do you work like the others do?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; I oversee the work of others and try to +make them happy, and see that no one is idle and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_117" id="p_117">p. 117</a></span> +that the laws are obeyed. For that work I am +paid, just as the others are paid for the work they +do. I do this work because my people ask me to +do so, and they pay me a certain number of coins +for the work, the same as the man is paid for the +particular work he does."</p> + +<p>This doctrine, so entirely new, could not be +grasped at once, and he continued with his questionings: +"But the people may not want me as their +chief, and take some one else, and that would +cause trouble, and no one would know who was +chief."</p> + +<p>"Then it becomes your duty to so conduct yourself +that they will not want some one else to be +chief. If a man works for me and he does not +know or care how he does the work, or is careless, +and I cannot depend on him, I get somebody else +in his place. Would you keep such a man?"</p> + +<p>"No; but I would have the power to send him +away."</p> + +<p>"Then the wise chief must know that if he acts +as a true father to his people they will not try +to get another chief."</p> + +<p>Blakely had been a man of affairs at home, and +was a sharp, shrewd business man. To him the +Professor entrusted the arranging of the affairs of +the town, impressing on him the importance of directing +the natives into a wide and diversified character +of enterprises.</p> + +<p>The business was one admirably suited to his +temperament. He had long ago spoken to the +boys and John about the promotion of the island, +by the establishments of various industries, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_118" id="p_118">p. 118</a></span> +particularly agricultural pursuits, which would +require workmen to cultivate coffee, cocoa, the +spices, and the numerous vegetable products which +grew in a wild state in great abundance everywhere.</p> + +<p>These various articles, if grown systematically, +would mean an immense source of wealth, and +should afford employment for all the natives, and +thus mean their advancement.</p> + +<p>The hills were full of mineral. He knew this, +and had the testimony of the Professor as to the +valuable character of the various ores. Sooner or +later communication could now be established with +the outer world. All were contemplating the preparation +of a suitable vessel which would enable +them to return to the United States.</p> + +<p>One evening, while the conversation was on this +absorbing topic, he remarked: "I don't know how +you gentlemen feel about this place, but as for +myself I feel that from a business point of view +this is the ideal spot. I am just as anxious as you +are to see my home again, but the possibilities +are so immense here, that, as soon as possible, +I shall come back."</p> + +<p>"For my part," replied the Professor, "if a +ship should appear in the harbor to-morrow, I +would not for a moment consider leaving these +people. The work of their redemption is not even +started in such a way as to permit me to safely +leave them. The boys may well be pardoned and +commended for wanting to go home, but my work +is here."</p> + +<p>"That expresses my sentiment exactly," said<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_119" id="p_119">p. 119</a></span> +Harry. "I want to go home, it is true, but what a +wonderful experience we have had here, and when +I think of the remarkable progress we have made +it astonishes me more than I can tell you. If I do +go home it will be to come back again, because I +want to be where the Professor is. I like this +work, and the excitement it affords."</p> + +<p>"You won't have any more savages to fight," responded +the Professor, "and it might not be so +interesting for you."</p> + +<p>"Making guns is much more pleasant than using +them against people."</p> + +<p>George's face was a study. He was the sentimental +one of the lot. He was by all odds the +most emotional, and the greatest lover of home. +But withal that he reechoed the sentiments of +Harry. "If I could only see home again, I would +be content, and when I came back it would be to +know that I could return whenever I wanted to."</p> + +<p>All the boys were enthusiastic about the trip +home. Many plans were projected, and talked +over.</p> + +<p>"Won't it create a sensation," remarked Ralph, +"when it is announced that three of the <i>Investigator's</i> +lifeboats were wrecked on an island, and +that the survivors arrived after an absence of—"</p> + +<p>"Yes," broke in Tom. "How long?"</p> + +<p>"That will depend on several things," said +John. "First, to bring the Illyas to terms, and +second, to build a boat big enough to take us safely +to the nearest harbor which is in communication +with America. As for myself, this life and the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_120" id="p_120">p. 120</a></span> +hopes for the future are too alluring for me to even +try to get away."</p> + +<p>With characteristic energy Blakely consulted +Harry and the working force in the shop.</p> + +<p>"Do you think we could turn out some plows?" +he asked.</p> + +<p>Harry smiled. "This establishment is prepared +to turn out anything it has orders for."</p> + +<p>"Then put down my order for a half dozen +plows, to be delivered as quickly as possible."</p> + +<p>The new town was located within the territorial +limits of the Osagas' country, and it was now +necessary to make immediate provision for some +sort of laws or regulations with respect to the +land. The savage theory was that the chief owned +all the land, and this was a condition that well +might breed trouble.</p> + +<p>Osaga was the chief. He was the first to receive +the full understanding of the new doctrine. +It was proposed that he should receive as full compensation +a certain stipulated sum, and in return +make a transfer of all his rights to the State.</p> + +<p>"But what is the State," he asked, "and who will +he be?"</p> + +<p>"The State will mean all of you."</p> + +<p>"Then I will own a part of it just the same as +everybody else?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; let me explain that still further. When +your people begin to raise coffee and cocoa, and +all the other things which the people in the world +will come here for and buy of you, the lands all +about you will become very valuable, and many +will come here to buy them. The money will go<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_121" id="p_121">p. 121</a></span> +to the State, which means you and everyone else +here."</p> + +<p>"Will it be done the same with the Berees, and +the Kurabus and the Saboros?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; each will be a State of its own, and will +be governed in the same way, and a Saboro will +come here and buy some land, and you will protect +him, and when one of the Osagas goes to the +Berees he can buy land there, and they must protect +him and his wife and children."</p> + +<p>"Yes; I see what you mean. I am content. I +will do this whether the others do or not."</p> + +<p>"But I assure you," continued the Professor, +"that the others will be compelled to do as you +do."</p> + +<p>"How can we compel them?"</p> + +<p>"No one will want to buy their land, and they +will not become valuable for that reason, like +yours, because the people who come here will buy +only where they know there is a law and where +they know they will be protected."</p> + +<p>Uraso grasped the wonderful import of this +statement, and became its most enthusiastic advocate. +He had many talks with Marmo and Muro, +and he presented the matter in such a way that +most suitably appealed to the savage mind.</p> + +<p>The all-absorbing topic now was the proposed +expedition to the Illyas. Marmo, the Tuolo chief, +had sent a message to their chief, in which he set +forth the advantages which would accrue to them +to quietly submit, and also stated that he did so +willingly, in the belief such a course would be of +the greatest and most lasting benefit.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_122" id="p_122">p. 122</a></span></p> + +<p>Marmo had received no response, and the outlook +boded no good. Preparations were begun, +and Marmo insisted that his warriors should form +part of the force, and that he himself would accompany +the expedition. As the boys, by the +aid of their helpers, had been at work on the guns +from the time the factory was set up, they had +a hundred and twenty guns completed. This was +ample for any requirement.</p> + +<p>Two new wagons were also made, and several +smaller ones, designed for single steers, the latter +being used by the Professor and the chiefs in going +to and fro.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_123" id="p_123">p. 123</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h2> + +<h3>THE PECULIAR SAVAGE BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS</h3> + + +<p>The chief Marmo had now an opportunity to +learn another lesson he was not prepared for. +Many of the warriors objected to going on the expedition. +The work at the factory and in the various +occupations so fascinated them that they +begged to be excused.</p> + +<p>At the request of the Professor many were excused +from going, care having been taken to consult +the boys who had charge of the various parts +of the business as to the ones which could best be +spared.</p> + +<p>Marmo mused over these things. He saw the +great cordiality that existed between his warriors +and the other tribes. He was also gratified to see +some of his men making things which were novel +to him, as they were fascinating to the men.</p> + +<p>The Krishnos were all about and were the personal +charges of the Professor. He had them, +daily in the laboratory, and all seemed to be +pleased and happy. Marmo wanted to know +whether they desired to go home, but all declined. +There seemed to be a fascination about the place +he could not understand.</p> + +<p>One evening the Professor saw a Tuolo worker +stealthily coming up the pathway leading to the +laboratory, and after looking about with a curi<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_124" id="p_124">p. 124</a></span>ous +air, pushed open the door, and in the most +subservient manner begged permission to speak.</p> + +<p>The Professor took him by the hand and led +him to a chair. "What is it you want, my man? +Can I do anything for you!"</p> + +<p>The hearty manner and smiling face of the Professor +emboldened him to speak.</p> + +<p>"I have a wife and three children in the Tuolo +village, and I want permission to bring them +here."</p> + +<p>"Don't you want to go back there?"</p> + +<p>"If I do then I will have no more work. I like +the work. I can make many things now, and I +want my family here."</p> + +<p>This was an appeal which could not be neglected, +and he responded in this manner: "You +do not need to ask me to bring your family here. +You have a right to do so."</p> + +<p>"But my chief will not let me do so."</p> + +<p>"Did you ask him?"</p> + +<p>"No."</p> + +<p>"Then I will send for him."</p> + +<p>"When Marmo appeared the Professor told him +the desire of the man, and when he had concluded +the chief was puzzled for a moment, and, turning +to the warrior, said:</p> + +<p>"I cannot understand why my warriors do not +care about going to war. They like the machinery, +and the way the little things are made, and to +learn how to make them. The White Chief says +you have a right to bring your family here. That +is well; but you must not forget your people, and +when you learn these wonderful things you must<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_125" id="p_125">p. 125</a></span> +come and teach the people at the village how to +do them."</p> + +<p>He was extremely gratified at this permission. +A half hour afterwards the Professor called Tom +and told him of the incident, and suggested that +he should be provided with a quantity of food for +the journey. But he had already gone. That was +certainly sufficient to show the intense eagerness +to bring back his people.</p> + +<p>George and Ralph were the ones who were always +on the alert for new things, and Jim made +a good companion for them in this respect. The +latter was the first one to actively canvass the +subject of a name.</p> + +<p>There had been too much to do even to think +of this before, and if it occurred to the Professor +he had never mentioned it. Jim went over to +see the Professor as soon as the idea occurred to +him.</p> + +<p>The Professor smiled when he saw Jim's eagerness.</p> + +<p>"Yes, the idea is a good one, but that is something +which you boys will have to decide. It has +not occurred to John and Blakely, I know."</p> + +<p>"I thought it would be a good thing to call it +Industria, or something of that kind," responded +Jim.</p> + +<p>"I like that name, but you settle it among yourselves." +Jim was back very quickly, and rushing +in to the boys, cried out:</p> + +<p>"The Professor said it was up to us to get a +name for it."</p> + +<p>"Name for what?" asked Harry.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_126" id="p_126">p. 126</a></span></p> + +<p>"For the town, of course."</p> + +<p>"Well, what shall it be?" asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"Call it America," shouted Will.</p> + +<p>"Oh, that's too big a name," roared Ralph, with +a scornful touch in his voice. "Just imagine how +this would sound: 'William Rudel, Esq., America, +Wonder Island?' What would the postmaster +think of such an address?"</p> + +<p>It did look a little out of proportion, as the boys +laughed at the sally.</p> + +<p>"Let's call it Independence; everybody seems to +be pretty independent here," was Tom's suggestion.</p> + +<p>"I have the best name in the lot."</p> + +<p>"What is it?"</p> + +<p>"Industria."</p> + +<p>"There you are again with your Latin," answered +Harry. "This is going to a real American +town. None of your Latin endings, or any other +dead language. This is a live town."</p> + +<p>"Here is John; let's get a suggestion from him."</p> + +<p>He heard the merry laughter, and as he approached +wonderingly inquired about the cause of +the hilarity. George said: "We have been holding +a convention to find a name for the town. We +have decided to leave it to you."</p> + +<p>"Name of the town? Let me see. I suppose +you want a stunning name? Something that will +make people sit up and take notice. Eh? Well, +if it turns out all right it doesn't need a name, +and if it is a failure everybody will be calling it +names."</p> + +<p>The boys laughed at this first attempt that John<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_127" id="p_127">p. 127</a></span> +had ever essayed to treat a subject in a jesting +way, but he continued: "If this convention hasn't +enough wit about it to select a name I don't think +you ought to get an outsider to make a suggestion. +But seriously, Unity would be a good name; +and so Hustletown."</p> + +<p>"Unity is just the thing," suggested George. +There was not a dissenting voice.</p> + +<p>"Now that we have the name, I suppose we shall +have to christen it to make it hold," remarked +George.</p> + +<p>"Considering the trials and tribulations we have +gone through to put this town on the map it doesn't +need any christening. If we work as hard to make +it a success as we did to get it started we needn't +be ashamed of it," said Harry.</p> + +<p>"Probably, the same principle will apply in this +case as the sentence uttered by the Hindoo priests +at the christening of an infant."</p> + +<p>"What is that?"</p> + +<p>"Thou hast come into the world with all around +thee smiling; so live that when thou departest thou +mayest smile while all around thee weep."</p> + +<p>"That is a beautiful sentiment. Hurrah for +Unity!" and George raised his hat to start the +shouting.</p> + +<p>As the expedition against the Illyas was about +ready to start, the time for the departure was set +for the following day. Two of the wagons were +brought into requisition, and loaded with sufficient +provisions to prevent the necessity of foraging +too much.</p> + +<p>George and Harry begged to be taken along, as<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_128" id="p_128">p. 128</a></span> +they had put in some strenuous times during the +two months at Unity, and this was readily granted. +The other boys were to remain and take charge of +the active work. John had command of the expedition, +and Blakely had now too much work at +the new town to enable him to take part.</p> + +<p>Over three hundred warriors were mustered for +the expedition. One hundred of the picked men +had the muzzle-loading guns, and an ample supply +of ammunition was stored in the wagons, and each +gun bearer had twenty-five rounds.</p> + +<p>The Professor said, on the eve of their departure: +"I have every confidence in the ability of Mr. +Varney to make it unnecessary to give him any advice, +but I must say a word to all the warriors. +You are going to the tribes, not for the purpose +of revenge. We know they have captives in their +possession, and we have demanded their return. +They sent us an insulting message.</p> + +<p>"Notwithstanding this, we must consider that +they have sent us this reply out of ignorance of our +true purpose. Each man must conduct himself as +the chiefs dictate. There must be no killing except +in self-defense."</p> + +<p>Muro and Uraso, as well as Ralsea, were to accompany +them, but the other chiefs were kept at +home, this arrangement having been made because +the others really preferred to continue the +work in the factory and field.</p> + +<p>It was a glorious day to begin the campaign. +George and Harry were in their element.</p> + +<p>"What a wonderful thing it is to look at these +people now, and recall what our situation was a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_129" id="p_129">p. 129</a></span> +year ago," said Harry, as they drove down the +road which had been made from the village to +the east.</p> + +<p>"Yes; a year ago, we were having some troubles, +as it was about that time we got the first +intelligence that these people were on the island," +answered George.</p> + +<p>"I had particular reference to the trip we made +by sea, when we were wrecked the second time."</p> + +<p>The entire column marched out past the Professor +and the chiefs Oma, Suros, Marmo and +Tastoa. The six tribes had contributed to the +expedition, which they hoped would end all future +wars, and put the island in a condition of peace, +and thus enable them to carry out the great work +planned by the Professor.</p> + +<p>Before evening of the second day the main Saboro +village came in sight. Muro was in a heaven +of delight. Many of his warriors were in the column, +and some still remained at Unity. But the +women and children were still there, and they +rushed out to meet the advancing column.</p> + +<p>The news of the uprising of the Illyas was confirmed. +A large party of them were less than a +day's march to the east, and the appearance of the +fighting force was a welcome one. There was no +reason to apprehend that they had any knowledge +of the surrender of the Tuolos.</p> + +<p>The night and part of the day spent at the Saboro +village was a period of feasting. Uraso met +his sister, the wife of Muro, and the boys were +lionized by the chief's family, who took particular +pleasure in entertaining them. They had heard<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_130" id="p_130">p. 130</a></span> +so much about the remarkable boys, and their capacity +to make the beautiful things.</p> + +<p>Harry and George brought with them a number +of the mirrors, and those, with other little trinkets, +were presented to the women. The boys were +particularly impressed with Muro's eldest son, a +boy of their same age, and George won Muro's +heart when he asked if he could not accompany +them.</p> + +<p>Speaking to Harry he said: "Wouldn't Lolo enjoy +the work at the factory? I hope he will let +us take him with us when we go back."</p> + +<p>"I am going to ask Muro," replied Harry, and +he sought him out at once. "We want Lolo to go +back with us to Unity."</p> + +<p>Muro was delighted at the proposal, and he +answered: "Yes; Lolo shall go back with us, because +all of my family are going with us and we +shall live there."</p> + +<p>This news was a source of the greatest pleasure, +you may be sure, and it was most gratifying +to Muro, because he admired the boys.</p> + +<p>"Lolo will like to work in the shop with you. +He can now make the best bows in the tribe, and +he makes fine arrows." And Lolo exhibited some +of his handiwork, which, from the standpoint of +the native weapons, was really creditable.</p> + +<p>Returning now to Unity, we shall have to relate +some very singular thing's which should be mentioned, +as it shows the peculiar beliefs and practices +of the natives.</p> + +<p>On the day the force left the village occurred +the first death in Unity. This was one of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_131" id="p_131">p. 131</a></span> +warriors, who had been wounded during the last +fight with the Tuolos and Illyas, and he had lingered +along until he finally succumbed. He was +one of the best men, and was mourned by the +Osagas, of which he was a member.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 339px;"> +<a id="illus-131" name="illus-131" /> +<a href="#p_131"> +<img src="images/illus-fig13-p131.png" width="339" height="238" +alt="Fig. 13. Ready for the Happy Hunting Grounds." title="Fig. 13. Ready for the Happy Hunting Grounds." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 13. <span class="u">Ready</span> <span class="u">for</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Happy</span> <span class="u">Hunting</span> <span class="u">Grounds</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>Singularly, another of the same tribe died the +following morning, who was the exact opposite +of the warrior. Within six hours of the death +of the latter his friends carried him away, and +he was buried. The warrior, however, was not +buried, but, instead, his body was carried to an +open place, fully a half mile beyond the town, and +placed on a hanging cot suspended from two trees.</p> + +<p>The boys witnessed the ceremonies, and could +not understand the meaning of it.</p> + +<p>"Why do they bury one so soon after death, and +keep the other for several days, and then suspend +his body in the air?" asked Tom.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_132" id="p_132">p. 132</a></span></p> + +<p>The Professor, who attended both ceremonies, +responded: "This action on their part has a great +significance. In most savage countries there is +no more noble thing than to die on the battlefield. +Usually those who die in that way are not accorded +a burial, generally, because, in case such a warrior +belongs to a defeated party, his friends do not +have the opportunity to inter the body.</p> + +<p>"Sir Samuel Baker, in his book, 'The Explorations +on the White Nile,' relates an incident where +he came to a village which had two graveyards, on +opposite sides of the road. On one side were the +scattered bones of the dead, and on the other side +mounds to indicate burial plots.</p> + +<p>"On questioning the chief, he said: 'Yes; our +honored dead have their bones exposed, as you +see, but those who were of no use are put out of +sight underground.'</p> + +<p>"So the object seemed to be to keep them where +the people could see them?"</p> + +<p>"That appears to be the reason the chief gave to +Baker. But there may be another reason for this +custom, and I shall get Suros' views on that subject."</p> + +<p>"Isn't there some religious meaning connected +with it," asked Ralph.</p> + +<p>"I do not think so. Here is Suros; let us question +him."</p> + +<p>As Suros approached the Professor said: "I +notice that one has been put underground and the +other not; why do they observe this difference?"</p> + +<p>"We cannot honor the dead by allowing them to +go back to the earth."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_133" id="p_133">p. 133</a></span></p> + +<p>"Why will it do any good to honor the dead?"</p> + +<p>"If we did not honor them, no one would want to +be great. No one would like to be a great warrior."</p> + +<p>"Is that the only reward a man has, to be honored +after he is dead?"</p> + +<p>"What other reward has a man?"</p> + +<p>"Do you not think man will live hereafter?"</p> + +<p>"When? After he dies?"</p> + +<p>"No; how can man live after he dies, and his +body is given to the winds or to the earth?"</p> + +<p>"The white man believes he will live again?"</p> + +<p>"Does the white man believe the yak will live +again?"</p> + +<p>"No."</p> + +<p>"Well the yak is stronger than a man, and if +the yak cannot live again, then how can man, who +is not so strong, expect to do so?"</p> + +<p>This was a bit of philosophy which sounded curiously +to the boys, and the Professor, noticing it, +said: "Singularly, this is the same answer which +Sir Samuel Baker obtained from certain African +tribes, when he questioned them in like manner."</p> + +<p>But the Professor was interested in Suros' statement +that they would not permit the body of the +honored dead to go back to the earth, and he continued:</p> + +<p>"You said that you did not want the honored +dead to go back to the earth. When you give his +body to the air, does it not go back to the earth?"</p> + +<p>"No; the earth and the air are entirely different, +The Great Spirit is in the air; not in the earth."</p> + +<p>"Then you give him to the Great Spirit?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_134" id="p_134">p. 134</a></span></p> + +<p>"Yes; the Great Spirit takes his body."</p> + +<p>"Don't you believe that man has a spirit also?"</p> + +<p>"No; because we have never seen it."</p> + +<p>"But you have never seen the Great Spirit, and +yet you say there is one."</p> + +<p>"We have seen the Great Spirit. He comes when +it rains, and we can see him and hear him. We can +feel the wind that he blows, and we can see the +great light which he makes every day, and the +smaller lights at his villages every night."</p> + +<p>Two things were thus impressed on the boys—namely, +that they considered the air entirely distinct +from the earth, and that the Great Spirit +made the thunder and lightning, and that the sun +was the Spirit's light by day, and the moon and +stars the lights of his villages by night.</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding Suros' limited knowledge, it +must be said that in his further talk with the Professor +he showed himself to be possessed of qualities +which placed him far above the common run +of the natives. When he was asked why honor +was such a prize to them, he answered:</p> + +<p>"Our good men are happy to know that they +are so placed that the Great Spirit can take them. +What greater happiness is there for him?"</p> + +<p>"Don't you believe that trying to make your people +happy and contented will please the Great +Spirit?"</p> + +<p>"We do not know that. We do not know why +the Great Spirit should want the bodies of our +great warriors and good men. We cannot understand +it."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_135" id="p_135">p. 135</a></span></p> + +<p>"The white man believes that if you do good to +your fellow-man it will please the Great Spirit."</p> + +<p>"That may be; but I do not see why. There is +no reason why he should care how I treat my people. +That is not what he is up there for. What +good will it do him? How will it help him? I do +not believe many of the things I have been told +by the wise men, and I have never sacrificed the +captives I have taken, although my father before +me did. I try to make my people happy, because +when I see the Great Spirit giving us the day and +the bright light and the rain, so that the things +about us may grow, it seems to me that he is trying +to be good to us, and I believe that is what we +should do to each other."</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_136" id="p_136">p. 136</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h2> + +<h3>EXPEDITION TO SUBDUE THE ILLYAS</h3> + + +<p>The occupation of the little houses by the families +of the natives gave the boys the first close +view of the people in their home lives. They +were exceedingly primitive. The leaf of the plantain +tree was the greatest boon to these people, +and the women were engaged most of the time +in removing the beautiful fiber and in laboriously +weaving cloth from the strands.</p> + +<p>They were exceedingly deft in this, and it is +singular how quickly they grasped the idea of +the loom, as a means to make a better article. +The loom used by them was a very crude affair, +and an idea may be gained of its form by the +accompanying illustration, which shows the fork +of a tree branch (A), which serves to hold the +ends of the warp threads (B). To weave the +goods, the woof thread (C) is threaded back and +forth, and as they had no needles for the purpose, +a thorn was used.</p> + +<p>This thorn had no eye, but its large end was +split, and the end of the thread held in the cleft +thus made. Every family had this primitive +loom, and the whole time, outside of their other +household duties, was given to the weaving +process.</p> + +<p>The size of each woven piece was about twelve +by fifteen inches, and the different sections were +afterwards sewn together. When they saw the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_137" id="p_137">p. 137</a></span> +more modern looms at work it interested them +intensely, and the Professor, noticing their eagerness +and natural talents in this direction, concluded +that this was a good field to encourage +the industry.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 346px;"> +<a id="illus-137" name="illus-137" /> +<a href="#p_137"> +<img src="images/illus-fig14-p137.png" width="346" height="167" +alt="Fig. 14. Primitive Weaving Frame." title="Fig. 14. Primitive Weaving Frame." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 14. <span class="u">Primitive</span> <span class="u">Weaving</span> <span class="u">Frame</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>Most of the looms made goods thirty inches +wide, and it was not long before several of the +women were instructed in the art of using the +looms. Like all of the low order of people, they +were extremely fond of colors, and that is one +of the things which attracted them to the fabrics +which had been previously made and exhibited. +At the end of the week they were paid for their +work, the same as the others who were employed. +The Professor now considered it time to make a +change in the system of providing supplies. Under +the direction of Will, a store was set up, which +had on hand a supply of vegetables and game. +As many of the warriors were away, and the +others were generally employed in the workshop +and fields, some systematic effort had to be made +to gather food supplies and hunt.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_138" id="p_138">p. 138</a></span></p> + +<p>By offering certain sums for such articles the +Professor induced individual effort in that direction. +The provender thus provided was placed on +sale in the store, and by every art the heads of +families were encouraged to purchase those things +and take them home for consumption there.</p> + +<p>Gradually, the workers were made to understand +that a certain sum would be expected in return +for their board, so that, in course of time, +each one became accustomed to know the values +of certain things all of which were measured by +the coins now in circulation.</p> + +<p>The kitchen utensils were very limited indeed. +They had no metal vessels of any kind. Any article +of that kind was worth a fortune, and it was +only the chiefs who had such things, and they +were obtained from the wrecks of vessels which +had reached them from time to time.</p> + +<p>Under the direction of the Professor, considerable +time was given to the bringing in of ores, +particularly iron, and the process of recovering +the metals from the ores was undertaken by a +considerable part of the force.</p> + +<p>Charcoal and coke were turned out, as a preliminary +to the smelting of the ores, and as fast +as the metal was in shape, cooking vessels of various +sizes were manufactured, and these were +placed on sale at the store. It was thus possible +for each family to acquire several articles of this +kind, which heretofore had been considered the +most valuable of all treasures.</p> + +<p>Such a thing as a chair or a table was unknown +on the island. The beds were made of the native<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_139" id="p_139">p. 139</a></span> +grasses, strewn on the floor. It will be understood, +therefore, that the manner of furnishing +the houses occupied by the whites was a marvel; +and when the families of the various workers +moved into their new possessions, it naturally +dawned on them that chairs and tables, as well +as properly arranged beds, should accompany +such luxury.</p> + +<p>The Professor was at the homes of these people +daily, suggesting ideas for comfort and convenience. +One of the things which interested him +most was the subject of cleanliness. People living +in the manner to which they were accustomed, +made the sanitary part of the domestic arrangement +an exceedingly difficult problem.</p> + +<p>The necessity of cleanliness was impressed on +them very forcibly when, later on, he was called +to administer to many of the children, who were +attacked by diseases, brought on directly by carelessness +in thoroughly removing all dirt and decaying +matter.</p> + +<p>To a certain degree the natives understood this, +and the subject has been referred to previously, +where they had the habit of anointing their bodies +and those of the infants with various oils, which +were obnoxious to insects and germs.</p> + +<p>That knowledge made the task of using disinfectants +much easier to instill in their minds. It +was impressed on them that properly caring for +the home was a daily task, and must not be +neglected.</p> + +<p>The women used combs made from the fins of +fish. These were constructed in the following<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_140" id="p_140">p. 140</a></span> +manner: The entire fin was removed, and the bony +structure at the base of the teeth was bound between +two strips of bamboo, and tied around by +fibers, as shown. The whole was then placed in a +vessel containing boiling water. The result was +that when taken out the meat of the fish, being +glue-like, would act as a cement to hold the teeth +in place.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 337px;"> +<a id="illus-140" name="illus-140" /> +<a href="#p_140"> +<img src="images/illus-fig15-p140.png" width="337" height="115" +alt="Fig. 15. Comb from fin of Fish." title="Fig. 15. Comb from fin of Fish." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 15. <span class="u">Comb</span> <span class="u">from</span> <span class="u">fin</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Fish</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>Such combs are anything but sanitary, as might +be surmised, and the inhabitants were subject to +pests arising from articles so made. Their only +salvation was, in fact, the daily habit of using oil, +and, from a sanitary point of view, there was nothing +objectionable to this excepting the odor which +naturally followed, due to the oil becoming rancid. +The boys then began to make combs from a specie +of bamboo, and from the ironwood tree.</p> + +<p>During one of the fishing trips the boys brought +home an immense turtle. The Professor's eyes +sparkled when he saw it.</p> + +<p>Will related their experience in capturing it. +"Is it good to eat?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes; all turtles and tortoises are good to eat."</p> + +<p>"What is the difference between the two?"</p> + +<p>"The turtle is a sea animal, and the tortoise<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_141" id="p_141">p. 141</a></span> +a land and water animal. You must have caught +this near the sea, as it is a specie of turtle called +the Testudo."</p> + +<p>"What a beautiful mottled top it has!"</p> + +<p>"That is why it interested me so much," replied +the Professor. "You now have something that is +far better than the wood for making combs and +other like articles."</p> + +<p>"Isn't that fine! Will it be difficult to make +them up from this?"</p> + +<p>"It is the simplest thing in the world. The +outer shell, which is all that is used, is put into +boiling water, and this softens it so that it can +be worked easily."</p> + +<p>"It seems singular that it is called a 'tortoise' +shell if the land animals are called tortoises."</p> + +<p>"When the shell first became a matter of commerce, +it was supposed that the turtle and the +tortoise were the same, and the name tortoise +being much older than turtle, the former appellation +remained in designating the shell."</p> + +<p>The day and night of festivities of John and +the warriors, at the Saboro village, was ended, +and the column took up its march for the country +of the Illyas.</p> + +<p>Several of the scouts, sent out two days before, +returned during the night, and reported that there +was a strong force directly ahead and that the +lower villages were also sending up a body of +men, but that the latter were still two days away.</p> + +<p>Calling Muro, John asked: "What is the +nature of the country to the extreme south, or +next to the sea?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_142" id="p_142">p. 142</a></span></p> + +<p>"I have never been there, but it is elevated, +and is a fine country. One of my men has been +there, and he may be able to tell you something +about it. I will call him."</p> + +<p>The warrior alluded to was tall, handsome +and fully tattooed, as was the custom with the +most distinguished of the Saboros.</p> + +<p>"Can you tell me," asked John, "what the nature +of the country is south of the mountains, and +near the sea?"</p> + +<p>"It is the country of the wise men of the Illyas. +They will not allow others to go near there."</p> + +<p>"Do you know why?"</p> + +<p>"It is said there are wonderful things there."</p> + +<p>"Do you know whether there are any big holes +in the ground there?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; and in some of them they keep their +captives."</p> + +<p>"Do they sacrifice their captives in those +places?"</p> + +<p>"No; they take them from those places to the +villages."</p> + +<p>"At what times do they make the sacrifices?"</p> + +<p>"When the night is dark."</p> + +<p>John understood from this that the sacrifices +were during the period when there was no moon.</p> + +<p>"Why do you suppose that they wait for that +time?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"Because the Great Spirit out of anger has +hidden the light and to appease him the sacrifices +are offered at that period. This is one of +the tales that the wise men give out as the excuse +for the ceremony."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_143" id="p_143">p. 143</a></span></p> + +<p>John had another motive for these questions, +as will appear later on. The main Illyas village +was far to the north of the caves mentioned. Besides +the main one were three others, all ranging +along the western base of the mountain.</p> + +<p>"How long will it take us," asked John, "to +reach the main village?"</p> + +<p>"Osaga knows about that, as he was near there, +and was detained for several weeks before he +escaped."</p> + +<p>"I had forgotten about that." He was, however, +at this time, one of the scouts, and when he +returned later in the evening, said:</p> + +<p>"We can reach there in two days, unless we +should be met by the Illyas on the way. I do +not think they will retreat without making a show +of fight, as they will have all their warriors in +the field, when they know we are marching against +them."</p> + +<p>At the rate they were going, the main force of +the enemy would be reached during the day, unless +they should retreat. The opinion of both +Uraso and Muro was that they would not permit +too close approach to the village before offering +fight.</p> + +<p>The entire route from Unity, and through the +Saboro country, was one continual stretch of immense +undulating plains, covered at intervals +with magnificent forests, and it was evident that +the soil was rich and capable of yielding any products +in profusion.</p> + +<p>The weather, too, was magnificent. Indeed, it +was at a time of the year when there were few<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_144" id="p_144">p. 144</a></span> +storms, the moisture being sufficient to support +the growing vegetation and keeping it a beautiful +green. What a paradise this part of the island +would be made, if it could be maintained in +peace!</p> + +<p>The march was a continued and steady one, the +warriors appearing happy and acted as though +they were going to a festival, instead of to war. +Early in the afternoon the advance scouts reported +the first sight of the savages, but only +detached bands, which indicated, however, that +they were not far away.</p> + +<p>Several hours before they had entered the Illyas' +country. There was no strict dividing line +between the different countries, but it appeared +to be tacitly agreed that certain water courses, +or other natural lines, marked the territorial limits +of each.</p> + +<p>These divisions were so little understood, in +fact, by either, that they caused frequent disputes. +A party from one tribe in hunting would, +incautiously, venture too far, and if the other +party happened to be near, and in sufficient force, +would attack on the plea that the territory had +been invaded.</p> + +<p>This was a matter which the present campaign +would settle, because the Professor saw the necessity +of accurately prescribing the limits held by +each tribe.</p> + +<p>It was five o'clock in the evening before reports +came in that the main body of the enemy was +in sight. John went forward with Uraso and +Muro, fully a mile beyond the main force, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_145" id="p_145">p. 145</a></span> +on the way selected a good camping spot, leaving +several there to order the main body to encamp +when they arrived.</p> + +<p>With the scouts now returning, and which were +picked up, a fairly adequate idea was obtained +as to the number, which was variously estimated +at two hundred and fifty, which did not take into +consideration the warriors from the other villages, +because they now had knowledge of at least +one party from the south, on the way to reinforce +the Illyas.</p> + +<p>John gave strict orders that no one should +fire a gun during the night, and that a double +line of guards should be maintained. The course +pursued during the campaign was as follows: +Thirty pickets were selected for the watch, five +from each tribe. These formed fifteen posts, two +warriors being at each post, and it was arranged +that the two should be of different tribes, and as +all were in supporting distance of each other, in +case of an alarm, one of the two watchers would +thus be in a position to quickly alarm the camp.</p> + +<p>An advance set of pickets was also thrown out, +under the personal command of Muro, to watch +the enemies' camp. Fortunately, there was no +alarm during the night. Early in the morning +the forces were put in line for approaching the +Illyas' camp.</p> + +<p>When the first advance came within sight of +their camp, the utmost consternation and confusion +resulted, showing how carefully John had +concealed their movements.</p> + +<p>Muro's scouts had the fortune to capture one<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_146" id="p_146">p. 146</a></span> +of the Illyas, who was evidently one of the hunters, +and the captive was brought in at the time +when some of his own men had advanced uncautiously +too far.</p> + +<p>He was brought before John at once, who addressed +him as follows:</p> + +<p>"Why have your people started out on the warpath +against us?"</p> + +<p>"Because you killed our warriors in the last +battle."</p> + +<p>It is singular how the natives in all their interviews +of like nature, always found it convenient +to refer to the last and most immediate act as +a particular reason for their enmity. In this respect +they were veritable children.</p> + +<p>They might have been, as they were in this +case, the original aggressors, but if an attempt is +made to repay them the original cause of the strife +is forgotten, and the last act only is considered. +John knew it would be of no use to argue the +matter with him.</p> + +<p>"You may go back to your chief and tell him +that we have come to get the captives he has. +You must tell him that we have no desire to injure +him or his people. Tell him that all the tribes +are now united, and that if he does not give up +the white people and all others, we will take him +and his villages, and give his lands to the other +tribes.</p> + +<p>"You must further tell him that we must have +his answer at once, and if he does not answer by +the time the sun is above us (noon), we will consider +him our enemy, and shall attack him."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_147" id="p_147">p. 147</a></span></p> + +<p>The captive received full instructions from +Uraso, who warned him that if he failed to convey +this information in the manner given it would +go hard with him.</p> + +<p>John went forward with the prisoner, and he +was released within sight of the Illyas' camp. +The enemy was at that time in great commotion, +as they were, from all indications, preparing for +defense.</p> + +<p>They occupied a naturally strong position. The +camp was on the western side of a hill and at the +bottom was a small stream.</p> + +<p>Directly behind the camp was a heavy forest, +which, in case of retreat, would afford them shelter. +There was a bend in the river, where the +camp was located, so that the position was impregnable +as against the native weapons.</p> + +<p>The Illyas were not counting on meeting a foe +armed with guns like the allies possessed. They +did not conceive how their enemies could possibly +make a sufficient number of guns to count against +their numbers and their skill.</p> + +<p>In the talks which John had with Uraso he +learned the history of this peculiar tribe. Originally +the tribe had practical sway over the entire +island. They were bitter and vindictive, and +this intense feeling was that which acted against +them in the end.</p> + +<p>The result was that in times past a constant +tribal warfare was in evidence among the heads +of the leading families. The Kurabus and the +Tuolos were originally Illyas, or offshoots from +this great tribe. This was also shown by the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_148" id="p_148">p. 148</a></span> +characteristics of those three tribes, and by their +dress as well as language.</p> + +<p>John had noticed that the Berees were the +whitest people on the island, and that the Osagas +and Saboros were much lighter in color than the +other tribes. Uraso confirmed Suros' statement +to the Professor, that there was white blood in +the veins of many of the people of these three +tribes, brought about by castaways who had been +adopted by the people in earlier times.</p> + +<p>The Illyas kept themselves aloof from the +others, excepting the Tuolos and Kurabus, and +these three tribes were the only ones who still +adhered to the custom of offering up captives as +sacrifices.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_149" id="p_149">p. 149</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h2> + +<h3>THE PERILOUS TRIP OF THE WAGON</h3> + + +<p>Affairs at Unity were moving along at marvelous +speed. Suros, chief of the Berees, announced +to the Professor that he did not intend to return +to his country, but would send for his family and +the families of all his chiefs. This was, indeed, a +pleasant surprise for the Professor.</p> + +<p>Oma, of the Brabos, was the next to fall into line, +and we have already stated that such was Muro's +intention. The bringing together of all these interests, +to form one common family, was really +the intention of the Professor, and it was now +being carried out without any suggestion on his +part.</p> + +<p>Each day brought to the village accessions from +some of the tribes, mainly the women and children +of those who were employed, or who were with +John's forces.</p> + +<p>Four days after John's departure the Professor +saw one of the Tuolos approaching, carrying +an infant, with his wife and two other children. +The Professor went out to meet them, calling +Will, as he saw they were in a famished condition. +It was the native referred to previously, +who had begged permission to bring his family +to Unity.</p> + +<p>Several of the little cottages had been completed, +and the surprise of the Tuolo and his wife<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_150" id="p_150">p. 150</a></span> +was complete when he led them to one of these +homes, and installed them in it.</p> + +<p>Food was brought, and the native cooks ordered +to prepare it for them at once. The act so astonished +the Tuolo chief, Marmo, that he could +not express himself. For a day he sat pondering. +The Professor noticed the act, but he said +nothing. The next morning Marmo called, and +said:</p> + +<p>"I can see why the White Chief told me it was +well to act so the people would not want another +chief."</p> + +<p>"But I am not acting in this way so that the +people will want to keep me as their chief."</p> + +<p>This reply puzzled him.</p> + +<p>"But why do you treat my people in this way?"</p> + +<p>"Because he is a man just like myself. I have +no right to treat him in any other way."</p> + +<p>"But he is only a ravoo (common) man."</p> + +<p>"Why is he only a common man?"</p> + +<p>"Because he is not a warrior, nor were his +people warriors before him."</p> + +<p>"But he is a man, the same as you and I are. +Because he is not a warrior, or was not born of +some one who was a warrior, or if he does not +belong to the family of a chief, makes no difference +to the white man. His children may become +chiefs, or great men, and if we show them that +they may become like we are, it will make all of +them better, and it will not injure us."</p> + +<p>This philosophy was too deep for the chieftain. +He could not comprehend it, nor could he find<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_151" id="p_151">p. 151</a></span> +words to express his opinions of the new light +which it gave him.</p> + +<p>"Is that why you teach the people to make so +many things?"</p> + +<p>"No; that is for an entirely different reason. +We teach people to make these things so they +may be able to help themselves and make their +wives and children happy. We try to teach them +that it is wrong to be idle. To let them know +that there is a better way to live than by fighting +each other or injuring their neighbors."</p> + +<p>"But why do you act so kindly to one of my +people when we tried to kill you?"</p> + +<p>"That makes no difference to us now. You +acted that way because you did not know any better. +You would not try to injure us now, would +you? Do you think that man would be my enemy? +When he tells his friends what I have done, will +they be my enemy?"</p> + +<p>"These things are all so new to me. There will +be no more Tuolos, or Osagas, or Berees."</p> + +<p>"Yes; there will be the same tribes always. In +the white man's country there are still the same +tribes in the different countries. They love to +think of their own country and their own people, +even though they may live with the other tribes, +and when a man goes from one tribe to live with +another, the people protect him just the same as +though he was one of them."</p> + +<p>The Professor was not yet through with his +lesson, and suggested that Marmo should accompany +him. They wandered through the town, and +called at the cottage of the newly arrived Tuolo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_152" id="p_152">p. 152</a></span> +The children were playing about, and the wife +was supremely happy, but awed when the Professor +and chief appeared.</p> + +<p>The Professor took up the little one and affectionately +caressed it, to the astonishment of the +mother. She knew the Chief Marmo would not +condescend to such an act; but to think that the +Great White Chief should do such a thing was +something beyond her comprehension.</p> + +<p>Marmo looked on in amazement. It was another +thing which was unlike any teaching or belief +that he had ever known, that it made a powerful +impression on him.</p> + +<p>This is but one incident in the history of the +village which tended to instill in the minds of the +people, the cardinal duty of man to man. It was +a practical example, and the knowledge of it went +from family to family. It became one of the topics +of conversation among the men. Equal and +exact justice was meted out to each, irrespective +of what their tribal relations might be.</p> + +<p>In the absence of Harry and George, Ralph and +Jim had charge of the factory, and were busy +each day turning out plows and other agricultural +implements. At the suggestion of the Professor, +eight more of the steers had been trained to work, +and he gathered together a dozen of the best men, +and gave instructions to secure as many of the +yaks as could be found.</p> + +<p>He offered certain sums for this purpose. It +was known that, to the west, and north of the great +forest, were large herds running wild. The proposal +stirred them to activity. The party pre<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_153" id="p_153">p. 153</a></span>pared +for the hunt, and in this were assisted by +Blakely, who gave them many timely hints as to +the best method to lasso them.</p> + +<p>The first expedition started the day after John +left, and within a week the first installment of +ten animals arrived, and they had returned for +more. These were tamed and broken to work. +The scenes about the town were assuming the +proportions of a vast beehive of the most earnest +and enthusiastic workers that it was possible to +imagine.</p> + +<p>Fields were now laid out, and certain money +offers made for the production of seeds of various +kinds. Coffee-tree shoots, nutmeg plants, +cocoa cuttings, and many other like species of +vegetation were apportioned to the newly plowed +fields.</p> + +<p>Every kind of vegetable known to the island, +and which now grew in a wild, but scattered, state, +was sought for, and distributed in small patches +over the plowed area. Fruit trees were set out, +and these latter, with a view to make them the +home sites which were to be the next lines to be +developed.</p> + +<p>It will thus be seen that there was enough to +tax the energies of Blakely and the Professor, +to keep the laborers employed, and prevent any +drones from getting into the hive.</p> + +<p>When the captive Illyas which John had sent +with the ultimatum did not return, nor did the +enemy show any symptoms of complying when +the sun neared midday, it was concluded that the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_154" id="p_154">p. 154</a></span> +only plan to pursue would be a quick and a sharp +assault.</p> + +<p>The moment the sun reached its height, John +ordered Muro to take one hundred of the men by +a detour to the right, and Uraso with a like number +to the left.</p> + +<p>"Cross the stream and close up behind them +in the woods. I will make the attack, and you +remain at a distance. If they should attempt to +retreat I will follow them up rapidly. We must, +if possible, force their surrender."</p> + +<p>The two forces were off promptly, and within +a half hour John judged that they must be in +position. The Illyas were still on the hill in +force, apparently not suspecting that two flanking +columns were in their rear.</p> + +<p>As John gave the order to march forward +there was the crack of a half dozen guns to their +right, in the position occupied by Muro's force. +This startled the Illyas, as it did John. The latter +interpreted this at once. It was, undoubtedly, +a reinforcing band which Muro had intercepted.</p> + +<p>This was indeed the case. The knowledge of +this force coming to their assistance, was probably +the reason why the Illyas were so defiant. +Muro, at the head of fifty of his men, charged +the band, to prevent them from uniting, but at +the same time it brought down on him a large portion +of the Illyas. Uraso, suspecting the truth, +and knowing that the excited movement of the +Illyas indicated a rush to assist, broke through +the woods and thus struck them on their left +flank, which so surprised them that they broke<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_155" id="p_155">p. 155</a></span> +in confusion and, fled before John and the main +body could come up.</p> + +<p>The entire Illyas force was now in confusion. +John was in possession of their camp, and Uraso's +warriors were hurrying through the dense woods, +so that between the three forces, a number were +captured in the effort to escape to the east and +south.</p> + +<p>Within an hour, not an Illyas was in sight, except +those captured, but the main force, unfortunately, +escaped. The wagons were brought up, +and now came the problem, how to get them +through the forest, without making too much of +a detour.</p> + +<p>Uraso suggested that Stut should take a sufficient +number of warriors to afford protection, and +descend the stream to a point below where the +country was clearer, and then trail to the east +and meet the main column five miles west of the +main village.</p> + +<p>The pursuers, under the leadership of John, +followed the trails of the disorganized Illyas, in +the hope that they would be able to be close on +their heels when they emerged from the forest four +miles beyond.</p> + +<p>They found this forest maze the most remarkable +of any wooded area on the island. The trees +were not only immense, but the undergrowth exceedingly +dense. It is not often the case that the +two growths are found together, and it would +have been impossible to get the wagons through +the mass.</p> + +<p>This forest was in reality the great barrier,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_156" id="p_156">p. 156</a></span> +which kept the Illyas in such a protected position +against the inroads of the other tribes, even +though they should have combined, and they +counted on this bulwark to protect them in the +present case.</p> + +<p>It took the pursuing force over three hours to +push its way through, and they had the satisfaction +of seeing the main body of the Illyas beyond, +and brought together in a compact organization. +As soon as the opening was reached, they halted +for the noon meal, and instructions were given +to follow up as hurriedly as possible.</p> + +<p>"We should move our force to the south, and +attack them from that side," said John, "for the +reason that their only hope of reinforcements is +from that quarter."</p> + +<p>The villages were lying along the base of the +mountain range, the general altitude of the great +plain being fully two hundred feet higher than +the other level portions of the island. The mountains +to the east, while not high as mountains go, +were by far the greatest of any on the island, and +John was anxious to know their character, for reasons +heretofore explained.</p> + +<p>In two hours more they would reach the vicinity +of the main village, and the great struggle for +the mastery would begin. In the distance could +be seen the main portion of the town, and it was +far more imposing than any other in the island. +There was more or less a mystery about the place.</p> + +<p>Uraso said: "The place we are now going to +is the oldest village in the country. Many, many +years ago it was a great village, and had big<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_157" id="p_157">p. 157</a></span> +houses. They were built by some people that no +one knows, but they were not built to live in."</p> + +<p>"Do you know what they are like?" asked John.</p> + +<p>"Nobody can tell, because they do not keep captives +there, and only take them to that place for +the sacrifices."</p> + +<p>"How do you know that the place has the wonderful +buildings you speak of?"</p> + +<p>"This was learned from the only captive who +ever escaped from them at the place. I was kept +at the village to the north, and it was from that +place I escaped."</p> + +<p>As the village was neared the sight of the buildings +astonished John. While not massive, they +were of a type entirely distinct from the native +huts. It was built on an elevated plateau and +amidst most magnificent trees, the most prominent +of which were the great redwoods.</p> + +<p>Some little indications of ground cultivation +were found, as they passed the deserted huts on +their way. Small patches of yam and cassava +were the principal vegetables noticed.</p> + +<p>It was nearly four o'clock before they crossed +a stream of water, flowing to the south, and beyond +which a good glimpse of the village could +be seen. John surveyed the scene and was astonished +at the character of the spot, since it had +evidently been chosen by design, and for some +particular reason.</p> + +<p>Its location at an altitude which commanded a +view to the north and south, and also afforded +a view to the west, betokened some reason not +compatible with the savage idea of a town. All<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_158" id="p_158">p. 158</a></span> +villages thus far found were close to streams, +and were located apparently by chance, but here +was a town which was more like a civilized place, +since it was so located that it afforded the finest +opportunity for drainage.</p> + +<p>But another surprise was in store for John. +"What are those peculiarly formed hills which run +to the right and left?" he asked.</p> + +<p>Muro had noticed them, but was unable to answer.</p> + +<p>"I have heard," said Uraso, "that they have +earth-houses to protect the town, but I do not +know how they are made."</p> + +<p>This information was sufficient to inform John +that the town was actually provided with a chain +of defensive works, and this greatly added to +his astonishment.</p> + +<p>"We are certainly getting at the heart of this +mystery," he said, musingly, as Muro came up. +The latter informed him that they had captured +two Illyas who were making their way to the +village from the south, and within ten minutes +they were brought before him.</p> + +<p>John questioned them, but they refused to impart +any information. The direction from which +they had come occasioned some uneasiness because +the wagons were en route from that quarter, +and they might be runners to the main village +for the purpose of informing the chief of the fact, +or, they might be from one of the villages announcing +reinforcements.</p> + +<p>As night approached, and no word was had +from the force with the wagon, John directed Muro<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_159" id="p_159">p. 159</a></span> +to take twenty-five of the best men, and go directly +south in search of the convoy.</p> + +<p>George and Harry accompanied the teams, and +when they left the main column the forest was +skirted in their trip southwardly. It was known +that the forest was less dense in that direction, +and after traveling thus for nearly four hours, +the men delegated to beat the forest to the east, +announced that they might safely turn to the east, +which meant two hours more of struggling through +a country which, without the warriors to aid +them, would have been impossible.</p> + +<p>Most of the men were ahead of the team with +their bolos, cutting down and dragging away the +trees and bushes, and thus forming a trail which +would allow the wagons to pass. It was past +six in the evening when the river was reached.</p> + +<p>In order to gain as much time as possible, Stut +and the boys concluded to push across, and move +northwardly along the eastern bank, as it was +evident the eastern shore afforded the best route.</p> + +<p>Before the plan could be put into execution a +body of Illyas appeared in force before them. +They hastily drew back, and after consulting, concluded +to proceed north along the western bank.</p> + +<p>They had not proceeded a quarter of a mile +before they ran into an ambush of Illyas, and +two men were struck by arrows. Stut gave the +order to fire, and the bush was cleared. Immediately +a force appeared in their rear, but Stut +advised an advance, as such a course would bring +them closer to relief.</p> + +<p>Another mile was traversed, but the first les<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_160" id="p_160">p. 160</a></span>son +was heeded, and the enemy did not come close +enough to enable the gunmen to get an opportunity +to shoot. But now an unforeseen obstacle +presented itself. They had been marching along +the more or less elevated bank of the stream, and +directly in their path was a stream flowing into +the main one, with steep and rocky sides, so precipitous +that it would be impossible for the +wagons to cross them, heavily laden as they were.</p> + +<p>The Illyas appeared in force behind them, and +apparently none were to the front, thus indicating +that they did not believe the wagons could cross, +and in this they were right. It was growing +dark. Harry suggested that they make camp and +arrange for protection during the night.</p> + +<p>This was done, the two wagons being placed +thirty feet apart, and the fort sections were used +to connect the rear ends of the wagons, so that +a U-shaped fort was thus provided, the open end +of the fort being toward the river, which was the +side they had no fear of, so far as the savages +were concerned.</p> + +<p>While these preparations were going on no attempt +was made to attack them. "They are +either waiting for morning, or for reinforcements," +was Stut's comment.</p> + +<p>"Do you think it would be possible to get a +messenger through to John?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"Yes; but it would be better to send two."</p> + +<p>"We can easily spare them," responded Harry, +"and you had better select them at once."</p> + +<p>Two intelligent warriors, one a Saboro, well +known to Stut, and an Osaga, were delegated to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_161" id="p_161">p. 161</a></span> +run the risk, and they started to the north along +the river.</p> + +<p>The night was intensely dark, but notwithstanding +this Muro pushed forward to the south, and +the utmost speed, under those conditions, was +not more than a mile or mile and a half an hour.</p> + +<p>It was known that reinforcements were on the +way from the south. They might meet such a +force, and the utmost caution was necessary. It +was fortunate that the two messengers from Stut +heard Muro's warriors, and for the purpose of +determining who they were, approached closely, +and made themselves known.</p> + +<p>This intelligence was sufficient for Muro to act. +The scouts guided them back, and as it was beginning +to grow light the cracks of several guns were +sufficient to indicate the direction of the wagons, +and the fact that the attack had begun.</p> + +<p>Muro was a tactician. The scouts stated the +situation, with the impassible ravine to the north, +and the attackers to the south of their position. +His force was on the eastern side of the river, and +moving back a sufficient distance to prevent knowledge +of his presence from reaching the Illyas, +went to the south, and crossed the river in their +rear.</p> + +<p>The attack of the savages was in force against +the wagon, and the spirited cracks of the guns +showed Muro that he must make haste if he would +have a part in it.</p> + +<p>Harry and George were seasoned fighters, but +in this case they were entirely in the dark as to +the numbers which opposed them. This lack of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_162" id="p_162">p. 162</a></span> +knowledge was the only thing which gave them +any concern. They knew that sooner or later +John would rescue them in force. The problem +was to resist and gain time.</p> + +<p>The Illyas had heretofore proven themselves +wonderful fighters and remarkably tenacious. +This attack was a more determined one than they +had ever witnessed. There was no cessation in +their forward advance, and they were most skillful +in seeking cover.</p> + +<p>The boys looked at each other, but neither spoke +his fears, if he had any; to say the least, it was +the most businesslike of anything which they had +witnessed.</p> + +<p>Suddenly, they heard the noise of a volley behind +the Illyas, and the latter made a concerted +rush for the underbrush to the west, as Muro, +with his men, sprang forward through the clearing; +and the boys, with Stut, sprang from the +wagon and started the cheering, followed by the +warriors.</p> + +<p>Muro rushed up and embraced Stut and the +boys. A hurried breakfast was prepared, and the +fort sections replaced. There was no time to lose. +They must get back to John and be prepared to +take part in the capture of the great village of +the Illyas.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_163" id="p_163">p. 163</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h2> + +<h3>THE REMARKABLE DISCOVERY AT BLAKELY'S MOUNTAIN HOME</h3> + + +<p>It was the custom of the Professor to take the +boys each week for an outing in some direction +from Unity. The most attractive part was toward +the great forest, west of the large river. Several +boats had been made, which were used principally +for fishing, and one of these was usually taken. +They would then sail down the little branch +stream, on which the town was located, and cross +the large river.</p> + +<p>During the entire time they were at the village +Blakely had not gone across the river, although +he frequently indicated a desire to do so, particularly +to look up the location of the home on +the hill at the forest's edge, where he found seclusion +from the savages for nearly nine months.</p> + +<p>The Professor and the boys insisted on his accompanying +them on this occasion, and having +given instructions to the men, they manned the +large boat and were soon on the western shore of +the river.</p> + +<p>The large quantity of driftwood, which was in +evidence here, as elsewhere, attracted the attention +of Jim, as he turned to the Professor.</p> + +<p>"I have often wondered why it is that there is +so much driftwood on the western shore of this +stream, and hardly any on the eastern shore."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_164" id="p_164">p. 164</a></span></p> + +<p>Blakely, his attention having been drawn to it, +remarked that he had found this to be the case +in a number of streams, not only on the island, but +elsewhere.</p> + +<p>"That is a singular thing," replied the Professor. +"It is accounted for by the rotation of the +earth, which is from west to east. The rotation +of the earth in that direction also accounts for the +prevailing trade winds which are from the east to +the west."</p> + +<p>"In what way should the rotation of the earth +cause the drift to move westwardly?"</p> + +<p>"There are two forces which act on a free object +on the surface of the earth, namely, centrifugal +and centripetal. The first named is that action +which tends to throw an object outwardly, like +dirt flying out from a rapidly moving wheel; and +the latter action is that which draws inwardly. +Thus the spokes might be likened to centripetal +force. The attraction of gravitation in the earth +is the centripetal force, and its rotation produces +the centrifugal force. When an object, like a +plumb bob, or an article floating on the water is +free to move, it is found to lag behind the movement +of the earth surface, this retarding movement +being sufficient to cause it to creep to the +west, with the result you have noticed."</p> + +<p>The hill pointed out by Blakely was fully three +miles west of the river. The four boys, Ralph, +Tom, Jim and Will, with Blakely and the Professor, +all armed with guns, made a party strong +enough to enable them to successfully withstand +the attack of any animal, and it was proposed to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_165" id="p_165">p. 165</a></span> +make a trip through a portion of the forest, so as +to get some idea of its character.</p> + +<p>To carry out this plan, their course was directed +to the west, and within an hour and a half were +well in the thick of the wood. The first thing that +attracted the attention of all were the magnificent +trees, among them a species of pitch pine, together +with immense redwood trees, and numerous oak +species abounded.</p> + +<p>Before they had penetrated a mile the first animals +were seen. They had never been hunted, as +the natives kept away from the forest fastnesses, +and it was singular to see the familiarity of the +animals. An immense panther, or tree leopard, +fascinated the boys, and they maneuvered to get +close enough for a shot. He was very wary, however, +and Blakely and the Professor kept in the +background while the boys stalked him from tree +to tree, and finally Ralph had him in range and +fired.</p> + +<p>He crashed down but alighted on his feet, and +without waiting for any explanations bounded +over to the spot where Ralph and Will were +crouched behind a fallen tree. Will saw the movement +and called to Jim and Tom, and the latter, +taking careful aim, fired, without, apparently, +checking the animal.</p> + +<p>With a powerful spring he landed on the tree, +not five feet from the boys, and Jim shot the moment +he landed, the shot taking effect in the left +eye, and he dropped his head and lay still, hanging +over the fallen tree.</p> + +<p>This was exciting, while it lasted, and gave them<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_166" id="p_166">p. 166</a></span> +something to talk about for the rest of the day. +Blakely dragged the animal down, and Ralph and +Will, trembling as they were, had their knives +out when Blakely commenced to skin the panther. +It was a fine trophy, made doubly valuable, as it +had been their first attempt to secure big game.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 352px;"> +<a id="illus-166" name="illus-166" /> +<a href="#p_166"> +<img src="images/illus-fig16-p166.png" width="352" height="272" +alt="Fig. 16. The Marmoset" title="Fig. 16. The Marmoset" /> +</a> +<span class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 16. The Marmoset</span></span> +</div> + +<p>The boys regretted that Angel had not accompanied +them, as they saw numerous orang-outan; +and here for the first time they came across whole +tribes of monkeys, particularly the marmoset, an +interesting little creature. The most striking +ones were the proboscis monkey, the face being +not unlike that of an old man with an extremely +long nose, with whiskers around the neck.</p> + +<p>Blakely and the Professor made many notes of +the trees, and discussed the uses to which they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_167" id="p_167">p. 167</a></span> +might be put, and the boys had their eyes open for +the wonderful display of animal life on all sides.</p> + +<p>It was fully two o'clock before their steps were +turned toward the north, so that the hill could be +reached, and when they emerged from the forest, +Blakely pointed out the spot and the best way to +reach it. The boys went forward with a rush, and +mounted the hill, but while they searched in every +direction could not locate the rocky recess occupied +by Blakely.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 340px;"> +<a id="illus-167" name="illus-167" /> +<a href="#p_167"> +<img src="images/illus-fig17-p167.png" width="340" height="363" +alt="Fig. 17. Proboscis Monkey" title="Fig. 17. Proboscis Monkey" /> +</a> +<span class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 17. Proboscis Monkey</span></span> +</div> + +<p>The latter came up smiling. "I told the Pro<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_168" id="p_168">p. 168</a></span>fessor +you would have some trouble in finding it. +Look directly above you."</p> + +<p>About twenty feet from where they stood was +a projecting rock, and to the left of it another, +extending out at right angles.</p> + +<p>"But how are we going to reach it?" asked +Ralph.</p> + +<p>"Go around farther to the right, and you will +find a vine. I used that as a ladder."</p> + +<p>Around to the right the boys scampered, each +trying to get there first. There was no vine in +sight. Blakely was coming up, as the boys turned +back, disappointed.</p> + +<p>"Not there?" he inquired. "It ran up this tree. +What is this? Some one has cut it off and dragged +it up to the shelf above; do you see it there?" and +Blakely pointed to the vine stump, hidden by the +grass and weeds.</p> + +<p>The boys saw the plain evidence of the cuts.</p> + +<p>"This is decidedly interesting," exclaimed +Blakely, as he turned to the Professor. "This was +done since I was here."</p> + +<p>The only way to reach the ledge was to climb +the tree and try to drag the vine from the ledge, +and Ralph volunteered to do this.</p> + +<p>It was not much of a task, and when the vine +had been drawn down he moved out on the limb +and easily stepped on the ledge of the nearest +rock, and then drew over the vine so the boys could +readily reach the main ledge.</p> + +<p>Blakely was the last to gain the top, and he led +the way around the first projecting rock. The +view from this point was a charming one.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_169" id="p_169">p. 169</a></span></p> + +<p>"Look to the east," cried Ralph; "see Unity +beyond; isn't this fine?"</p> + +<p>The boys now understood why this was a desirable +place for Blakely. It appeared to be absolutely +safe from either animals or man.</p> + +<p>"How did you ever happen to find this place?" +asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"Simply by accident—the fact is, I stumbled on +it. I mean that literally. You see there is only +one point higher than this. That is directly above +this ledge. I went up the hill from the forest +side, and came out to the point, and, missing my +footing, fell down to this ledge, and discovered that +the only way I could get out was by the vine ladder."</p> + +<p>"What is that?" exclaimed Will, springing back, +and pointing to an object in front.</p> + +<p>Blakely started forward like a shot, and moved +around the main point from which Will came. +The boys followed. Directly ahead, and on the +ledge in front of the recess were two skeletons. +The boys were shocked at the sight, and +the Professor stopped and intently examined +them.</p> + +<p>"Some one made this his home after I left +it, that is sure. Here are things I never saw."</p> + +<p>"Was this your gun?" asked Jim, as he picked +up a rusty weapon.</p> + +<p>"Yes," replied Blakely, in great excitement. +"But how did it get here? I had it with me when +I was captured the first time."</p> + +<p>He looked at the Professor in amazement, and +then began a minute search of the articles scat<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_170" id="p_170">p. 170</a></span>tered +about, and lying in the little coves within +the main recess. Here were found a sextant, several +knives, some coins, a bunch of keys, a package +of letters, written in German, a revolver, but +no ammunition, various articles of clothing, all in +the last stages of decay and eaten with holes by +insects.</p> + +<p>But the condition of the skeletons caused the +greatest speculation. They were lying near together, +and there was no indication of a struggle +between them. One was lying with the head resting +on a mass of molding leaves, and this was +drawn aside and examined.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 347px;"> +<a id="illus-170" name="illus-170" /> +<a href="#p_170"> +<img src="images/illus-fig18-p170.png" width="347" height="239" +alt="Fig. 18. The Mysterious Message." title="Fig. 18. The Mysterious Message." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 18. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Mysterious</span> <span class="u">Message</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>Here was the first real clue. A bit of paper, +evidently a page from a scrap book, which showed +faint traces of writing. Parts were entirely eaten +away, and after a time the following words were +deciphered:</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_171" id="p_171">p. 171</a></span></p> + +<table style="text-indent: 0;" +border="0" width="450" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="fragment"> +<tbody valign="top"> +<tr><td> +<p style="font-size:114%;"> +"Escaped during the night miles wes<br /> +tains lyas have Rogers right<br /> +faithful<br /> + (Signed) roman"<br /> +</p> +</td></tr></tbody> +</table> + +<p>The German letters contained no information, +excepting the name "Johan," to which they were +addressed, and were signed, "Matilda," all dated +during the year 1911.</p> + +<p>"One of these men was a white or Caucasian, +and the other was, undoubtedly, an aborigine, as +the skull formation clearly indicates. I am satisfied +that this one was a native," remarked the Professor, +after he had made an extended examination.</p> + +<p>"This letter may be an interesting one to decipher," +said Blakely, as he went over the contents +again and again. "It seems to me that the part +of the word 'lyas' has reference to the 'Illyas,' and +'tains' is part of the word 'mountains.' Probably, +it would read, if properly reconstructed, 'west of +the mountains.'"</p> + +<p>"Yes, and the space between 'night' and 'miles' +refers to the number of miles," added Ralph.</p> + +<p>"It is remarkable that we should find evidences, +of the work of the Illyas at the extreme western +part of the island, when they are living +near the eastern border," remarked the Professor.</p> + +<p>"I take it," answered Blakely, "that this letter +was transmitted to the man here, and was written +by some one, and conveyed, in all probability, +by this native."</p> + +<p>"That is a reasonable supposition. The word<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_172" id="p_172">p. 172</a></span> +'faithful' may have reference to him," responded +the Professor, after some reflection.</p> + +<p>"Well, we can do no more than give them a decent +burial," said Blakely.</p> + +<p>"It will be a difficult task to do that, as we +have no tools, and it would be necessary to carry +the bones a distance in order to inter them. If +the boys will gather up a quantity of stones we +can make a covering for them against the wall, +within one of the coves."</p> + +<p>This suggestion was carried out, and the bones +deposited beneath a mound, and after gathering +up the various articles they descended the vine +ladder and made a hurried trip to the river.</p> + +<p>Unity was reached as it was growing dark to +learn that two messengers from John had reached +them during their absence, detailing the sighting +of the Illyas' village, which was estimated to be +five miles west of the mountains.</p> + +<p>It was singular how this information seemed to +supply the missing word in the mysterious message +found with the skeleton on the hill. The Professor +at once made a copy of the letter, and forwarded +it by messenger to John. In the letter he +detailed the information of the finding of the message, +and he had hopes that they might be able +to find some traces of the people mentioned in the +letter.</p> + +<p>While awaiting the return of Muro, John made +a complete examination of the Illyas' village, encircling +it to get its full position, and thus enable +him to devise the best mode to attack, if it should +be found necessary to do so.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_173" id="p_173">p. 173</a></span></p> + +<p>He was astounded to note the character of the +buildings. They had been the work of white men, +it was evident.</p> + +<p>Muro, with the boys, and the wagons came in +sight before ten o'clock, to the intense relief of +John. He suspected the cause of the delay.</p> + +<p>"We had a lively brush with them, for a while," +said Harry, "but we had no fear at any time."</p> + +<p>"Harry is right about that, but I want to tell +you we have a different class of fighters to deal +with than anything we have experienced so far," +added George. "Why our fire didn't seem to +frighten them a bit, and they adopted the regular +Indian plan of getting behind trees and brush."</p> + +<p>"What kind of a town is that!" asked Harry, +as he took the first glimpse of the place through +the trees.</p> + +<p>"Something different in that line, too, as well as +in the fighting," answered John, as he smiled at +the question.</p> + +<p>"How big a town is it?" asked George.</p> + +<p>"I judge, from its size, that there must be fully +a thousand natives there, but they are keeping +pretty close. Do you see the line of breastworks +all around the place!"</p> + +<p>The boys were astonished at what they saw. +No wonder the other tribes hesitated to attack +them.</p> + +<p>The two warriors captured by Muro were +brought before John, after he had made a survey +of the place, and by the aid of Uraso one of them +was instructed to carry information as to their +intention to the Illyas.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_174" id="p_174">p. 174</a></span></p> + +<p>This was to the effect that in the event no reply +was received before noon no other effort would +be made to open communications. It was distinctly +impressed on the warrior that the Illyas must +give up all the captives, and that an agreement +must be entered into by them not to leave their +own boundaries in the future, and John also offered +protection and a safe return of any messenger +who might be sent back with the answer.</p> + +<p>The captive was released, and, bounding forward, +was soon within the line of earthworks +which surrounded the village. The message gave +a full two hours for them to decide. There was +not a sign of an Illyas until near the time limit, +when the same one which conveyed their message +was noticed approaching the line of the allies.</p> + +<p>He came directly to John, and conveyed this information:</p> + +<p>"The chiefs do not intend to do as the White +Chief says. They are entitled to the captives, and +intend to keep them. If the village is attacked the +white chiefs and the tribes will be destroyed. We +do not fear him and his fire weapons."</p> + +<p>John motioned to the warrior to depart. For a +moment he looked at John in amazement. Judging +the actions of the white man by the ethics of +the savage, such a message would have meant his +death. He glanced around stealthily.</p> + +<p>Uraso saw why he hesitated, and remarked to +him: "You are free to go. No one will injure you, +because the White Chief has given his word to +protect you. He is not like the Illyas. He does +not lie."</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_175" id="p_175">p. 175</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h2> + +<h3>THE SURPRISE AND CAPTURE OF THE ILLYAS' STRONGHOLD</h3> + + +<p>John smiled, as he saw with what satisfaction +Uraso gave him this parting shot. Still he hesitated.</p> + +<p>Uraso went up to him, and he started back. +"You need not fear me because we will keep our +word. Say to your chiefs that Uraso tells them +they are fools. The Illyas cannot succeed. They +will be crushed and their villages taken. Your +village is surrounded, and you cannot get aid from +your other villages. Go and tell them that we +shall not again ask them to treat with us."</p> + +<p>This address assured him and he first marched +along carefully, and soon made his way with celerity +to the village. The Illyas were, unquestionably, +as much surprised as the messenger at the +treatment he had received. It was so unlike all +former experiences.</p> + +<p>During John's investigations he had discovered +that the approach to the village on the east side +offered the best chance for a rush, as the character +of the ground was better suited to go up close to +the line of works, and from that point a better +view was obtained of the interior of the village.</p> + +<p>A movement during the daytime would disclose +his motives, and he therefore advised Uraso and +Muro of his plans, and suggested that as they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_176" id="p_176">p. 176</a></span> +would be able to mass the troops better during +the night, the attack should be delayed until early +morning.</p> + +<p>"During the day we will make a great show of +putting up a line of works to deceive them into the +idea that we intend to attack from this side. During +the early morning we will take three-fourths +of the force and steal around to the east, and +attack them with a rush."</p> + +<p>"But suppose they rush out in this direction?" +asked Muro.</p> + +<p>"We must keep a sufficient force here to hold +them in check, and, if necessary, to rush in from +this quarter; and I would like to have you hold the +ones left for that purpose."</p> + +<p>Muro was delighted at the position assigned +him, and thought he saw the slightest bit of feeling +on the part of Uraso; but this was soon quelled +when John took Uraso aside and said: "I want +you with me, as you know how to handle and direct +the men."</p> + +<p>"I have no right to feel offended because you +have given Muro this post. He is the best man."</p> + +<p>"He is no better than you, but you are better +than he for the position required when the charge +is made."</p> + +<p>This was, really, true. John knew the capacities +of each. Muro was a better tactician, but Uraso +had a much better hold on the affections of the +warriors, and he was a fearless and intrepid +fighter.</p> + +<p>The boys could not help admiring the fine situ<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_177" id="p_177">p. 177</a></span>ation +of the village, and the imposing appearance +of the town.</p> + +<p>"See that building facing this way? It has pillars +different from the building to the left. Why +do you suppose they made them unlike?" was +George's query, as they sat in the wagon with +John during the afternoon waiting for night to +come.</p> + +<p>"I suppose they wanted to put in the different +kinds of architecture, simply as a freak, or for +some other purpose that I have not yet settled +in my mind. If I am not mistaken there are at +least three different orders of architecture represented +in the buildings. On the other side of the +town you can see another building, somewhat +smaller than the one to the left, which has still +different columns."</p> + +<p>"I imagine the one fronting us is the main building. +What order does that belong to?"</p> + +<p>"That is a Doric front. It had its origin in the +log hut, which was called Dorus."</p> + +<p>"How many kinds of architecture are there?"</p> + +<p>"There are five distinct orders, as they are +called."</p> + +<p>"What are those besides the Doric?"</p> + +<p>"The Ionic, the Corinthian, the Tuscan and the +Composite."</p> + +<p>"What is that building to the left?"</p> + +<p>"That is distinctly Ionic."</p> + +<p>"I don't see much difference from the Doric," +remarked Harry.</p> + +<p>"The distinction is very marked. The Ionic is<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_178" id="p_178">p. 178</a></span> +proportioned to the dimensions of a man, and has +the delicacy of the human figure."</p> + +<p>"Yes; I can see that now. Has the proportion +anything to do with the order?"</p> + +<p>"The Tuscan is distinguished by the fact that +the column is usually made seven times the diameter +of the lower part of the shaft in height."</p> + +<p>"But I notice that the ones shown in the two +buildings don't appear to be very much different +in proportions."</p> + +<p>"No, for the reason that the distinctive features +between the Doric, Ionic and Corinthian pertain +to the capitals. Notice how exceedingly simple the +Doric is. I am sorry there are not other examples +present, but I shall make some sketches to show +the differences which are marked."</p> + +<p>"I have heard more about the Corinthian than +any other kind."</p> + +<p>"That order is the most beautiful of all, and for +that reason is so frequently referred to by writers. +It is designed to represent the delicacy of a young +girl. The capital is the most ornamental of all +the orders, and it is also larger and much more +showy."</p> + +<p>"But you have not yet described the Composite."</p> + +<p>"The Composite or Roman, is the Ionic grafted +on the Corinthian. From this you will see that +not only the general form, but also the proportion +and the ornamentation, go to make up the various +orders. To illustrate: The Ionic has, as one feature, +two scroll-like ornaments, called volutes, and +it has more moldings and is much more slender<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_179" id="p_179">p. 179</a></span> +than the Doric. To make the Composite there is +borrowed the quarter round molding (A) from the +Tuscan; the leaves (B) from the Corinthian, and +the volutes (C) from the Ionic."</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 348px;"> +<a id="illus-179" name="illus-179" /> +<a href="#p_179"> +<img src="images/illus-fig19-p179.png" width="348" height="322" +alt="Doric. Ionic. Corinthian. Tuscan. Fig. 19. Orders of Architecture." +title="Doric. Ionic. Corinthian. Tuscan. Fig. 19. Orders of Architecture." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption"> +Fig. 19. <span class="u">Orders</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Architecture</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>During the night all preparations were made +for a quick transfer of the main force to the east. +Works were thrown up very ostentatiously during +the afternoon, in their position on the west of the +village, and it was obvious to the trained eye of +John, who was constantly observing the movement +in the village, that they were bringing the warriors +to the side facing these preparations.</p> + +<p>John, together with Muro and Uraso, crept up<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_180" id="p_180">p. 180</a></span> +close to the line of breastworks, during the night, +and satisfied themselves the Illyas were deceived +as to the point of attack.</p> + +<p>Shortly before four in the morning the warriors +marched out, making a wide detour to the right, +and within an hour were close to the east line, and +carefully concealed. The plan was for the men +under Muro to commence the attack, as soon as it +was light enough to see plainly, and the firing of +four guns was to be the order for the rush on the +part of the main force.</p> + +<p>All awaited the signal with impatience. Soon +the firing was heard, and instantaneously, as +though expecting it, the Illyas were seen rushing +through the village to the western line.</p> + +<p>John gave the word. To approach close to the +breastworks without firing a gun, and not to discharge +a single piece until they were well within +the fortified line.</p> + +<p>The entire force moved forward at the shots. +The line of entrenchments was reached, and John, +with Uraso by his side, was the first to leap over. +They halted fifty feet beyond the ridge, to allow +the warriors to come in and form the line, those +having the guns in front.</p> + +<p>With a shout, the allies bounded forward, withholding +their fire until the command should be +given. The Illyas up to this time were principally +arranged along the western wall, discharging their +arrows at the force under Muro.</p> + +<p>The appearance of the allies within the walls +was such a terrible surprise that all semblance of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_181" id="p_181">p. 181</a></span> +order was lost in their ranks. They began to scatter. +Uraso shouted out in stentorian tones:</p> + +<p>"Throw down your arms, or we will fire. Surrender +and you will not be killed."</p> + +<p>John and the front line were now alongside of +the second building, the one described by him as +having the columns of the Ionic order, which had +interested the boys so much.</p> + +<p>Notwithstanding the excitement of the moment, +Harry could not help looking at the building with +its tawdry and crumbling columns, and in doing so +espied a half dozen peculiarly garbed Illyas rushing +out and attempting to escape to the north along +the narrow street.</p> + +<p>Calling a dozen warriors, he, with George, made +a rush after the escaping fugitives, and before the +limit of the village was reached they were surrounded +and carried back.</p> + +<p>The Illyas warriors were now in a panic. There +seemed to be no one to order a surrender or a retreat. +John ordered Uraso to have his men spread +out to prevent escape in either direction, and as +he turned to execute the order, Harry and George +returned with the prisoners.</p> + +<p>At the sight of the captives Uraso shouted the +order to his men, and quickly turning to John, +who was slightly in the advance, cried out: "Here +are the chief and his principal advisers."</p> + +<p>John turned to look and noticed that they were +surrounded by the men in charge of Harry and +George.</p> + +<p>"Good work," he said. "Demand that he tell<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_182" id="p_182">p. 182</a></span> +his men to surrender." And Uraso repeated the +message.</p> + +<p>The chief saw the situation, but refused to give +the order.</p> + +<p>"Then we shall have to kill them, and unless +you surrender we shall attack at once."</p> + +<p>He had hardly finished the words when Muro, +seeing the condition of affairs, left their fortress, +and rushing forward scaled the low entrenchments, +directing a volley into the now thoroughly disorganized +and excited warriors. The entire body +of Illyas had seen the capture of their chiefs.</p> + +<p>The appearance of the chiefs at the head of the +column commanded by John made his position +safe from attack. Whether the chief refused to +comply with Uraso's demand from stubbornness, +or because he was paralyzed at the sudden changes +from his fancied security, was not apparent at the +time.</p> + +<p>The warriors now advanced with guns ready for +a volley, and the chief saw that resistance was +useless. He held up his hand as a signal. John +rushed forward toward the oncoming warriors +led by Muro, and the latter, seeing the chief in the +hands of Uraso, ordered his men to halt.</p> + +<p>Meanwhile the forces under Uraso had spread +out and were approaching the halting warriors, +who, one by one, threw down their bows, and, as +they did so, were marched to the open central part +of the village and surrounded by the men led by +Muro on one side and Uraso on the other. John +rushed back to the cordon surrounding the chiefs.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_183" id="p_183">p. 183</a></span></p> + +<p>Up to this time not the sign of a woman or a +child had been seen. But when order was finally +restored and the defenseless warriors were herded +together as compactly as possible, the huts surrounding +the main buildings were opened, as by +magic, and the women poured forth wailing and +shrieking.</p> + +<p>It was bedlam let loose. They pictured all the +terrors of captivity. They knew what it meant. +They passed around the cordon beating their +breasts, and shrieking like demoniacs. John, motioning +to Muro and Uraso, stepped aside, and +ordered the chiefs to follow.</p> + +<p>"This is the building they came out of," said +George quietly to John.</p> + +<p>"Then it will be a good place to hold the conference. +Uraso, instruct your men not to allow +anyone to leave his place within the circle, and then +attend the conference with us."</p> + +<p>The guards followed John as he entered the +building. The boys were eager to see the interior. +Once within they saw a dozen women and twice +that number of children huddled together in one +of the rooms. The entrance from the main door in +front led directly into a hall, and at the rear end +of the hall was a large room the entire width of +the building.</p> + +<p>Several smaller rooms were on each side of the +hall. It was, to all appearance, arranged like an +American or European dwelling, the entire interior +being finished in wood, but in a terribly dilapidated +condition.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_184" id="p_184">p. 184</a></span></p> + +<p>The surprise was still greater when they found +in the interior of the great room a number of articles +of furniture, such as chairs, tables, settees, +and articles which, in their younger days, might +have been rugs. Parts of bedsteads were littered +around, broken articles of furniture were scattered +here and there, and everywhere the place was lavish +with dirt.</p> + +<p>The boys had seen many native places where +filth had accumulated, but the atmosphere seemed +to fairly reek. It appeared so to the boys, who had +lived so much in the open, and who had such vivid +imaginations that the wrecked condition of the +interior suggested a worse atmosphere than there +really was.</p> + +<p>It was not close or confined, that was certain; +for the places which once, evidently, had windows, +did not contain even the suggestion of glass. It +was one mass of broken, misplaced, jumbled up +belongings, that would require the rebus manager +of a magazine to assemble in order.</p> + +<p>When Uraso returned, and the chiefs were +placed before them, the boys had an opportunity +to study the famous chief of the Illyas. They +took occasion to compare him with the others, for +the boys now knew all of them.</p> + +<p>He was a man, probably sixty years of age, +with the most curious headdress, which was +worked to imitate, somewhat, the crown, to which +his position entitled him. He wore a brightly colored +mantle, if it could be called such, for it was +simply thrown over one shoulder, and its pendant<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_185" id="p_185">p. 185</a></span> +ends were bound to the waist by a wide +girdle.</p> + +<p>He wore short trousers, or pantalets, and Harry +could hardly keep from laughing, as George suggested +that he was ultra-English in the way his +trousers were rolled up. He had the face of a +man of authority. His every action and look betokened +one who knew his authority, and the first +question, together with the imperious manner of +uttering it, indicated that he was a king, and he +knew it.</p> + +<p>He looked at Uraso and Muro, both chiefs, and +equal to him in rank. He did it with such an +imperious air as plainly indicated that he considered +them his inferiors. Uraso and Muro stood +there, with arms folded, dignified, and returned +his gaze with a dignity that won the admiration +of the boys.</p> + +<p>"I wonder how Uraso and Muro feel now, when +they have that old devil at their mercy?" George +whispered to Harry.</p> + +<p>When the circle had been arranged the chief, +Oroto, addressed John in this terse manner:</p> + +<p>"What do you want?"</p> + +<p>The question came like a shot. It was the first +word he had said. Neither of the others had asked +for information, nor had they deigned to notice +him, as they were marching to the council chamber. +This neglect on the part of Muro and Uraso +may have nettled him. The attitude of the chiefs +plainly irritated him.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_186" id="p_186">p. 186</a></span></p> + +<p>It is well known that people of this kind are +very sensitive to slights, or what they consider so. +It is just as likely that the two chiefs purposely +neglected him in that manner to make the humiliation +the more complete.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_187" id="p_187">p. 187</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h2> + +<h3>THE RESCUE OF FIVE CAPTIVES</h3> + + +<p>The question for the moment nettled John. +Here was a prisoner, powerless in his hands, imperiously +demanding of his captors what they +wanted. It may not have occurred to him that +such a question was out of place.</p> + +<p>John drew himself up, and with that piercing +glance which he could give, leaned forward, and +slowly, but with terrible emphasis, answered: +"Nothing."</p> + +<p>It was now the chief's turn to show a look of +surprise. He looked at John, and his eyes wandered +to Uraso and Muro. Neither indicated the +slightest curiosity at the answer. Not another +word was said as John kept his eye on the chief.</p> + +<p>Then seeing that he had a different kind of +creature to deal with than any he had heretofore +met, addressed John in an entirely different tone +of voice:</p> + +<p>"Why have you captured me and my warriors, +and why do you intend to destroy my village and +take my women and children?"</p> + +<p>"Because that is what you have been doing all +your life. We do not ask you to give us anything. +We have taken everything you have and shall not +ask you for permission in anything we do. We +have no desire to injure you or your people, and +whether we shall do so will depend on your ac<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_188" id="p_188">p. 188</a></span>tion. +If you will give us certain information it +may make it easier for you, but if you do not tell +us it will go hard with you."</p> + +<p>"I am ready to listen."</p> + +<p>"Did you receive the messenger I sent you three +days ago?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"What did he tell you?"</p> + +<p>"That you intended to kill me and my people."</p> + +<p>"Did he not tell you that we did not want war, +but peace, but that you must give up the captives +you had?"</p> + +<p>"No."</p> + +<p>"Send out for that warrior," John ordered, as +he glanced at Oroto.</p> + +<p>Muro accompanied one of the sub-chiefs, and +in a few moments returned with him. He came +in with face hanging down.</p> + +<p>He was placed before John. "Why did you +lie to the chief?"</p> + +<p>The savage was mute. He cast an appealing +glance at his chief, but the latter did not notice +him.</p> + +<p>Addressing Uraso, John said: "Take this man +out and beat him. He must be punished for +lying."</p> + +<p>George called in several of the warriors, who +were instructed to carry out the decree. In the +meantime Uraso called John aside, and stated +that the poor fellow had undoubtedly told the +truth, but the chief had lied.</p> + +<p>"I suspected that," answered John. "I do not +want the man beaten, so that you may go and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_189" id="p_189">p. 189</a></span> +stop the execution of it, but do not let the chief +know that the order was not carried out."</p> + +<p>"Did you get a second message from me yesterday +through one of your own warriors?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"What did he tell you?"</p> + +<p>"He said that you had declared war against +me and my people and would kill all of us and +take our women and children into captivity."</p> + +<p>"Did he not tell you that we came to make terms +of friendship, and that all we wanted was the +captives which you wrongfully held?"</p> + +<p>"No."</p> + +<p>"Bring in that warrior."</p> + +<p>Uraso went out with one of the sub-chiefs, and +when he appeared addressed him sharply:</p> + +<p>"Why did you lie to your chief, and not tell +him what I told you? Answer me."</p> + +<p>The chief merely glanced at the wretch, and +the latter bowed his head. The question was repeated, +and he was told that he would be protected +against the fury of his chief if he would +tell the truth. As he was about to reply the +chief merely glanced at him, and his lips were +sealed.</p> + +<p>"Take him out and beat him as severely as you +have beaten the other. These people must be +taught to learn that they should not lie."</p> + +<p>Uraso understood John's look, and acted accordingly. +He was taken out, but was not beaten.</p> + +<p>Turning to the chief, and acting on the information +imparted by Uraso, he startled Oroto by +the following question:</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_190" id="p_190">p. 190</a></span></p> + +<p>"Why did you lie to me and allow your warriors +to be beaten?"</p> + +<p>The question stunned him for a moment. John +did not permit him time to frame an excuse.</p> + +<p>"You lied to me when you stated that they had +told you the things you said, and I know it. You +are deserving of the same punishment as those +who were wrongfully beaten. Take him out and +see that he is punished as he deserves."</p> + +<p>This judgment against the august one was like +a death pall on the ears of the sub-chiefs. The +chief trembled; his footsteps, theretofore so supple, +were trembling, and he held out his hands +for support.</p> + +<p>The enormity of this punishment to a chief by +whipping is the most disgraceful thing that can +happen. The person of a chief must not be defiled +by a rod, which is intended only for children +and for offenses committed by the unruly members +of a tribe.</p> + +<p>The procession filed out, and John hurriedly +called Uraso and Muro to his side, explaining in +a whisper that they should intercede to prevent +the punishment.</p> + +<p>The excitement of the surrounded warriors was +intense, as the word was circulated that their +great chief had judgment pronounced against him, +and was to be publicly whipped.</p> + +<p>As they were proceeding across the open space, +Uraso and Muro, in well simulated tones, begged +that John should forego the punishment, but he +refused to comply until they had reached the +place selected.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_191" id="p_191">p. 191</a></span></p> + +<p>John advanced to him and said: "Your friends, +Muro and Saboro, have begged me not to inflict +the punishment for lying; I have decided not to +do so at this time, as I am guided by their judgment, +and I know they are wise. Instead, you +and your chiefs must come with me and see the +Great White Chief, and he may order that you +shall not be punished."</p> + +<p>This statement that he was not the Great White +Chief was another piece of news that he could not +understand.</p> + +<p>"And now, I want to know where you have the +captives?"</p> + +<p>He hesitated. He looked at Muro and Uraso +in a different manner this time. Uraso quietly +spoke to him: "You cannot escape the vigilance +of the white man. The wonderful fire guns can +kill all of your people. You do not know what +you are doing in trying to resist him. If you do +not tell him he will find them, and then I cannot +plead for you."</p> + +<p>The chief, turning to one of the sub-chiefs, said: +"Sama will take you to them."</p> + +<p>The boys jumped as they learned the import of +these words. They looked at John. The latter +turned to the chief and said:</p> + +<p>"How far are they from this place?"</p> + +<p>The distance was indicated by signs, which +Uraso interpreted to mean two hours.</p> + +<p>"Bring in the wagons at once, and unload one +of them; then take the other, with twenty-five +men well armed, and carry Sama with you. The +poor fellows are not, probably, in a condition to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_192" id="p_192">p. 192</a></span> +walk." Then, again turning to the chief, he +asked: "How many prisoners have you?"</p> + +<p>He held up his hand with fingers outstretched, +indicating five. There was no delay in preparing +the wagon, and Jack and Jill, the two old trustworthies, +were hustled along, to show the path of +freedom to some of the boys' former companions +and associates.</p> + +<p>John's last injunction was: "Be sure and take +plenty of food along." The order was unnecessary. +The boys had thought of this, and the wagon, +held precious little but articles of comfort for the +unfortunates.</p> + +<p>Sama directed the wagon to the north, and +Muro's son Lolo accompanied them on the journey.</p> + +<p>"Do you know," said Harry, "we are going +straight toward the Cataract?"</p> + +<p>"I had quite forgotten that," answered George. +"How I would like to go back again to the dear +old place!"</p> + +<p>"I have just been thinking, what a wonderful +life we have had since we landed here. We had +nothing when we came, and now we have everything!"</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered George; and he stopped, while +his eyes took on a blurry feeling, and the lashes +began to blink at an alarming rate. "All but +home!"</p> + +<p>Harry looked at George. There was an inflection, +which he caught.</p> + +<p>"Of course; I mean that, too. But we haven't +lost them. When this business here is settled we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_193" id="p_193">p. 193</a></span> +are to go to work on the big vessel. When I +think of that it eases my mind."</p> + +<p>"That is the great comfort to me, too. It makes +me happy when I think of the joy we are bringing +to the people here. I really love every foot of +this island. It has been a wonderful experience +to us."</p> + +<p>"And," responded Harry, "to think that we have +aided in restoring so many to freedom; John and +Blakely, and the four boys, and—I wonder who +the ones are that we are going after now?"</p> + +<p>"That is what I have been thinking about all +along. But did you ever see such bricks as Uraso +and Muro?"</p> + +<p>Lolo had learned many things in the short ten +days that he had been with them. The boys had +attained a remarkable knowledge of the language, +and Lolo was a constant instructor for them. He +was so simple and unaffected in his ways that +they grew to love him.</p> + +<p>Within two hours the location of the village was +sighted. It was distinctly noticed among the +trees, perched on a hillside, and the excitement +of the boys was intense. Stut was in charge of +the warriors.</p> + +<p>Before the village was reached several warriors +belonging to the Illyas appeared, but fell back +when they saw what was approaching. Stut +directed Sama to inform them that they had come +at the command of Oroto.</p> + +<p>This information did not satisfy them, but the +wagon did not stop. As it moved up the incline, +the warriors lined up, fully twenty of them, won<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_194" id="p_194">p. 194</a></span>dering +what the strange visit meant. There was +no act of hostility apparent, still they could not +understand why there were no Illyas present except +Sama.</p> + +<p>"Take us direct to the captives," commanded +Stut.</p> + +<p>Sama knew where they were. A typical native +hut, but much larger than the others, stood behind +the main homes of the village. To that the wagon +was directed.</p> + +<p>The warriors on Stut's command lined up behind +the wagon, and the boys, accompanied by +Lolo, rushed for the door. It was but the work +of a moment to wrench the bars away, and without +waiting for any ceremony George and Harry +were inside.</p> + +<p>The scene that met their eyes was appalling. +The five captives were in a pitiful state. Two +of the three boys were lying on filthy hay, and +one man, also badly emaciated, was on the other +side, lying down.</p> + +<p>The boy who was still on his feet rushed to +Harry and threw his arms about him. "Is that +you, Harry? Thank God! And George, too. +Where did you come from?"</p> + +<p>"Who is this?" came like a moan from one of +the boys. George stooped down. "Harry, here +is Robert—Robert Lamson; and who are you?" +And he crawled on his knees over to the other, +who feebly turned his eyes.</p> + +<p>Lamson turned to Harry, who was now on his +knees. "You know Min, don't you?" Min was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_195" id="p_195">p. 195</a></span> +the nickname of one of the boys, because of his +diminutive size.</p> + +<p>"Poor Min!" said Harry, as he put his arm +around him. "We will get you out of this at +once."</p> + +<p>"But we are so hungry," cried Robert, as the +tears streamed down his face.</p> + +<p>The boys were all crying now. The tears +streaked their faces. Lolo was very much affected, +but he was a jewel in this emergency. +He called to Stut, and together they carried out +Robert, and Harry, with his strong arms, lifted +Min as though he was a feather.</p> + +<p>They were carried to the wagon, and tenderly +laid on the clean, sweet hay. Poor Min had +fainted with the excitement, and Robert was not +much better. But who were the men?</p> + +<p>When Harry returned to the hut he found the +warriors around one of the men, talking excitedly. +He was a Saboro, and Stut recognized him as +one of his people, who, it was believed, had been +sacrificed long before. The other was a white +man, and he was lying in a sort of stupor, apparently +not recognizing his visitors.</p> + +<p>Harry spoke to him, and at the strange voice +he turned his head, and with an effort raised himself. +"Who is this? What do you want? Is that +you, Rogers?" and he fell back exhausted.</p> + +<p>The still active boy, Roy Whitten, came up, and +said: "He was here when we were brought to +the place. His name is Gustave Wright. He has +a wonderful story to tell."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_196" id="p_196">p. 196</a></span></p> + +<p>"What is the matter with him? Was he +wounded?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; but he is over that now. The trouble is +that he is starved, like the rest of us. Can't we +have something to eat?"</p> + +<p>"George is getting it ready for you. You must +eat sparingly at first. George will attend to that, +never mind."</p> + +<p>The Saboro was in better physical condition +than the others of the party. There was no time +for talk. The captives were fed sparingly. "Oh, +how good this tastes!" said Robert. "We had +given up all hope, after they brought us here. +We tried so hard to get away and go to the northeast +side of the island, where some white people +are living."</p> + +<p>Harry dragged Robert out of the hut, and called +to George. "Here, George, did you hear what he +said? How did you know there were white people +in the northeast part of the island?"</p> + +<p>"We saw it on a litter, which the Illyas brought +into their other village."</p> + +<p>Harry looked at George. "That was the litter +we made at the Cataract, and on which we carried +out the Kurabu. I wonder how the Illyas got +hold of it?"</p> + +<p>"Where is the Cataract?" asked Robert.</p> + +<p>"That is at the northeast part of the island. +That was our home."</p> + +<p>"But don't you live there now?"</p> + +<p>"No; we live in a big town at the southwest part +of the island."</p> + +<p>"But this is so wonderful to us. Just you two<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_197" id="p_197">p. 197</a></span> +boys, and all the savages. How did you manage +it?"</p> + +<p>"But we are not alone. The Professor has been +with us, and we have Mr. Varney, and we rescued +a Mr. Blakely, and four of the <i>Investigator's</i> +boys."</p> + +<p>"The Professor—the Professor, and Varney? +Rogers spoke about Varney. Do you mean the +professor of philosophy that you used to be so +chummy with?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered Harry, eagerly. "But let us +get busy now." Stut had rounded up the warriors, +and through Sama informed them that they were +wanted at the village.</p> + +<p>The women were in consternation, but Stut informed +them that no harm would befall the men. +Up to this time Stut had not permitted Sama +to give any information about the situation at +the village, but he now turned to the waiting warriors, +and said:</p> + +<p>"The Great White Chief and all the tribes have +united, and have taken the Illyas chief and all his +people prisoners, and all their women and children +are now captives. The Illyas have not acted +right and the chiefs must now go to the Great +Chief and show that he is sorry, and that he +will not again try to take captives, and will not +make sacrifices."</p> + +<p>Without waiting for a moment, the train started +back for the Illyas' village. It is wonderful how +the stimulating influence of surroundings will +build up and strengthen the depressed. The poor +boys, emaciated as they were, had smiles and tears,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_198" id="p_198">p. 198</a></span> +as they heard little snatches of experiences from +the boys.</p> + +<p>"We are telling you these things, but we are +simply crazy to hear your stories. But they will +keep. Let us do the talking now. You will be +all right in a day or two."</p> + +<p>The boys' eyes were kept on the vessels containing +the food. Time and again George would +shake his head as one or the other tried to get +another "bite." The liquid food was the first administered. +The journey back took much longer, +because Harry would not hurry the animals over +the rough roads with the patients in their low +condition.</p> + +<p>When the wagon and the train of warriors arrived +at the village, the only thing the boys saw +were the warriors of the allies. The captives +were in the buildings, and were guarded on all +sides.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_199" id="p_199">p. 199</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h2> + +<h3>REMARKABLE GROWTH OF UNITY</h3> + + +<p>"We haven't heard from John for two days. +I wonder if they have met with any difficulties?" +asked Will, as they were together the evening +after their trip to the hill and forest.</p> + +<p>"John is very prudent, and a man of very extensive +knowledge as a campaigner. If they had +met any disaster we should have known of it +before this."</p> + +<p>"We ought to have had a telegraph line. That +would keep us in touch with the army," added +Jim.</p> + +<p>"Wireless telegraphy would be still better," responded +Tom.</p> + +<p>"But how about wireless telephones?"</p> + +<p>"And if wireless telephones, why not wireless +power?"</p> + +<p>The Professor smiled, as one suggestion after +the other was made. The other boys smiled, too, +at Jim's last suggestion that power might be +transmitted by wireless.</p> + +<p>"That is going a little too far," said Will. "I +can understand why sounds can be sent, but power +is another thing, it seems to me."</p> + +<p>"I am afraid that is not a very logical conclusion," +interposed the Professor. "What is the +difference between sound and power?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_200" id="p_200">p. 200</a></span></p> + +<p>"I should say that sound is a motion in the air," +replied Will, "and that power is motion——"</p> + +<p>"In the air, too," continued the Professor. +"That is not a very good definition of the matter. +Let us try and make it clear. Sound is produced +by vibration; the lowest number of vibrations the +ear can distinguish, is sixteen per second, which +is known as the low bass notes of an organ. The +highest are, approximately, 12,000 per second. +These vibrations require power to produce them."</p> + +<p>"Do you mean to say that all vibrations require +power?"</p> + +<p>"Yes; nature speaks to us only in the form of +motion, or vibrations of some sort. Light, heat, +electricity, are merely different forms of motion. +Taste and smell, as well as sound, are merely +modes of motion. The beating heart; the winking +of the eyelids; the rhythmic breathing of the +body; the swinging of the pendulum; the movement +of the sap in trees and the unfolding of the +leaves; the light mists which go up and the rains +which bring the particles back again; the winds +and the waves; and the giant swings of the planets +through space, all show how nature performs her +work through unceasing movement; and all these +require power."</p> + +<p>"I remember," remarked Ralph, "about reading +of a Hindoo fakir in India, who claimed that he +could bring to him an object ten thousand miles +away, in ten minutes of time. As that was motion +it must have taken considerable power to +do it."</p> + +<p>"That is easily determined," answered the Pro<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_201" id="p_201">p. 201</a></span>fessor. +"Ten thousand miles would be 16.6 miles, +per second, at that velocity. If the article should +be only one inch square it would take 18,000,000 +horsepower to transport it that distance in the +time given. This calculation is sufficient to show +the absurdity of the Hindoo's statement."</p> + +<p>Considering that the new community was one +which had been recruited from a people which +had no ambition in life, except merely to live, the +work going on in every quarter was more remarkable +every day. Tom came to the Professor and +remarked: "It would do you good to go down +on street B and see how the Saboros have fixed +up their places."</p> + +<p>This was a sufficient hint for him, and busy as +he was, he sauntered in that direction.</p> + +<p>What he saw was, really, a surprise. Taking +the hint from the sodding operation which the +women had noticed around the boys' quarters, he +found that they had actually borrowed the wheelbarrows +and made some nice lawns.</p> + +<p>The Professor called in at the places, and congratulated +them on the beautiful appearances, and +the nice manner in which the work was done +What a wonderful thing that was to those poor +women, to see the Great Chief take such notice +of their work.</p> + +<p>He went into the cottages, and examined every +room, and suggested many changes, and offered +advice in the manner of keeping the houses clean, +and in taking care of the children. This work +of beautifying their homes was, of course, crude, +but it had a remarkable stimulus to the others.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_202" id="p_202">p. 202</a></span> +On every hand this was taken up. It was a spirit +of emulation that was worth encouraging.</p> + +<p>When John left with the forces, the Professor +consulted Blakely, and ordered the erection of +three larger and more pretentious cottages. Each +of these had five rooms, all plain, but arranged in +good taste, and the furniture was also being made, +and the large number employed enabled them to +complete the buildings ready for furnishing before +John's party returned.</p> + +<p>The working force was now ready to put up a +still larger building. "Do you know what this is +for?" asked Ralph, as the timber was being taken +to the new location.</p> + +<p>"I suppose this is to be the Town Hall," replied +Will.</p> + +<p>"No, indeed; it is the schoolhouse." And the +boys laughed at the idea. But it was an idea that +was well considered and determined on, long before +John left on the expedition.</p> + +<p>But the town was growing beyond all comprehension. +Daily new families arrived, and Blakely +was the busiest man in the place, in his efforts to +find work for them, while the Professor and the +boys were often at their wits' end to know how +and where they would house them. The Saboros +were the most numerous, followed by the Berees +and Osagas. But now the Kurabus were coming +in—the families of the warriors with John.</p> + +<p>The Chief Oroto saw and marveled at the sights. +During the entire time he had been there, he had +never suggested the idea of returning. The +Kurabu medicine men who had been brought down<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_203" id="p_203">p. 203</a></span> +with him, were still under the charge of the Professor, +and one day one of them accosted Ralph in +broken English.</p> + +<p>He looked up in surprise. It was the first inkling +that the so-called wise men were being taught +the language. Ralph had quite a conversation +with him, and reported the information to the +boys.</p> + +<p>How was this change brought about? The first +step of the Professor was to show the wise (?) +men some of the mysterious things which the white +men could do. The battery, which the boys had +made at Cataract, was one of the instruments. +Then he showed them the simple experiments in +chemistry; how ores were treated and metals extracted +and tempered.</p> + +<p>These things were so much more important and +wonderful than anything they could do or ever +dreamed of, that when he told them they could +do those things, he had the most willing pupils. +Hour after hour they would perform some task, +until they began to crave for new things. Then +began the work of instilling knowledge of the language +as a part of their education. They were +taught how to communicate ideas by signs in the +English language, and thus the alphabet was +taught.</p> + +<p>A spirit of rivalry was exhibited among them, +and it was so intense that they had no further time +for idleness or useless wanderings about the place. +It was no wonder that the boys saw so little of +them when the spirit once took possession of their +energies.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_204" id="p_204">p. 204</a></span></p> + +<p>Two of the men referred to had an undoubted +aptitude for chemical experiments, one of them, +Talala, being exceptionally bright and quick to +grasp the meaning of an experiment. He usually +accompanied the Professor on all his rounds visiting +the sick, because this was now an imperative +daily task on his part.</p> + +<p>The thermometer was in frequent use and +Talala understood its meaning. Only the simplest +remedies were used and administered, and +the gathering of the vegetables necessary for the +making up of the remedies was a part of the +work of each. In this the natives had a pretty +good knowledge, but they knew nothing of making +the extracts, or how to concentrate the compounds.</p> + +<p>Cinchona, the Peruvian bark, and calisaya, its +sister, which furnish the quinine of commerce, +were well known to them, but they did not know +how the white man made it so more efficient than +the crude product as used by them.</p> + +<p>He explained that by the use of an acid, like +that furnished by sulphur, a chemical change +could be produced, whereby a single grain would +be more efficient than a dozen grains in the way +they used it. This was labeled "Sulphate of Quinine," +and so on along the whole line of remedies, +he gave a term which they learned, and the reasons +for it.</p> + +<p>When John saw the wagon approaching he +rushed out, followed by Uraso and Muro. The +rescued captives were in the wagon. Pending +their arrival a number of the warriors had cleaned +out the large building—the one with the Doric<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_205" id="p_205">p. 205</a></span> +columns, which stood at right angles to the chief's +house. This structure appeared to be in the best +state of preservation.</p> + +<p>Another lot of the warriors took the wagon, +and with their bolos gathered a large quantity +of the sweet grass from the hillside, and this was +brought to the building and arranged for the use +of the chiefs and John, and for the boys when +they returned.</p> + +<p>George was eager to tell of their adventure, and +of the prisoners they had brought with them. +"We got three of the boys, but two of them are +very weak. We have a friend of yours, also."</p> + +<p>"Who is it?" exclaimed John, just as eager as +the boys could be.</p> + +<p>"Wright; Gustave Wright."</p> + +<p>John bounded into the wagon. Wright saw +John, and feebly extended his hand.</p> + +<p>"I knew I would find you sooner or later," said +John, as he put his arm around him. "But we +got you soon enough to save you. All you need +is something good to eat." And Wright smiled.</p> + +<p>"Yes," he answered. "They haven't permitted +me to take much so far; but I guess they are all +right. What a fine set of boys you have!"</p> + +<p>"The finest in the world. Wait until you know +them! But never mind about talking now. And +these are the boys? Poor fellows! What an +experience they must have had! Come on, men; +get them out and make them as comfortable as +possible."</p> + +<p>There were willing hands for every job. Muro +was delighted at the rescue of his friend. He was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_206" id="p_206">p. 206</a></span> +one of the most skillful and powerful warriors, +but he did not look like it at this time.</p> + +<p>Inside the patients were ranged about the place, +and the cooking stove brought in from the wagon.</p> + +<p>"I suppose I shall have to take charge of the +kitchen," said George, as he ordered it arranged +in place and directed them where to put the various +articles. Before long the savory odor of the +vegetables and game reached the famished ones, +and they begged for some of it.</p> + +<p>"A little at a time," said George, soothingly. +"I am doctor and cook, and there is plenty here, +of the best kind."</p> + +<p>"Oh, doesn't that smell good!" exclaimed Min, +joyously.</p> + +<p>"That's the way I like to hear you talk," said +Harry. "Your voice doesn't seem starved. +You'll be out in a couple of days, and be better +than ever."</p> + +<p>"How long have you been in that place?" asked +John.</p> + +<p>"In that particular place, only about a month; +but we were in a worse place, still farther south, +for about three months."</p> + +<p>"Starving all the time?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"I was moved to say that starving is a good +thing, in its way, but it has its limits, and four +months is a little too long for either comfort or +health. You will find, however," continued John, +"that you will be much healthier for the experience, +particularly if you have ever had stomach<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_207" id="p_207">p. 207</a></span> +troubles, as my friend Wright here has had all +his life. Isn't that so, Wright?"</p> + +<p>"Do you think I have been to a health cure?" +he asked.</p> + +<p>"Certainly; the best kind, for one in your condition." +And John laughed.</p> + +<p>"Probably you took me away before the cure +was effected; but as I always was magnanimous, I +shall forgive you this time."</p> + +<p>There was a continuous fire of conversation, +which cheered the patients, and added greatly to +their store of knowledge.</p> + +<p>Harry, who had been outside, rushed in, and +exclaimed excitedly:</p> + +<p>"Did you have <i>Investigator's</i> Lifeboat No. 3?"</p> + +<p>"Yes," exclaimed the boys.</p> + +<p>"Who wrote the note we found in it?"</p> + +<p>"Did you find our boat? Where did you get +it?" asked Robert.</p> + +<p>"We found it on a river to the north of this +place."</p> + +<p>"How in the world did it ever get there?"</p> + +<p>"But who wrote the note?"</p> + +<p>"What note?"</p> + +<p>"The message signed Will."</p> + +<p>The boys looked at each other, as they all shook +their heads.</p> + +<p>"That is one of the mysteries which George and +I thought you could solve."</p> + +<p>"Mysteries! Did you have many of them?"</p> + +<p>"Many of them! We had over a dozen, and +some of them are still on the puzzle board. Do +you remember Raggy, the drawing teacher? He<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_208" id="p_208">p. 208</a></span> +always liked to call some of our drawings the +unsolved puzzles. I wonder where he is? We +had enough mysteries the first three months to +supply headaches for a year."</p> + +<p>"We want to know about them."</p> + +<p>"We'll tell you all about them; and some were +mighty thrilling. We had some just as exciting +as any you ever read of in the last boys' series +that we had about two years ago."</p> + +<p>"You see," said George, in a sage-like tone, +"Harry and I don't read books of that kind any +more; we simply act them." And the boys, and +men, too, laughed at this sally.</p> + +<p>"Stop your talking for a while and eat something," +continued George.</p> + +<p>"Good, but it's awful hot," said Min, as he +puckered up his mouth and drew in a breath of +cool air.</p> + +<p>"I made it hot so you wouldn't eat too fast," +chuckled George.</p> + +<p>Just then a great commotion was heard on the +outside, and George, Harry and Robert rushed +for the door. Beyond the village a scrimmage +was taking place, and a few shots were fired.</p> + +<p>John and Uraso were racing across the open +place, and dozens of warriors were following. +Muro was seen as he emerged from the combatants, +and he was smiling as John came up.</p> + +<p>"The reinforcements from the south village +came too late. I suspected they would be here, +and I had a number of the men in wait for them. +They have captured all of them."</p> + +<p>John nodded his head with approval at the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_209" id="p_209">p. 209</a></span> +course of Muro. The warriors brought in the +prisoners, who were astounded at the unexpected +welcome which awaited them. Forty-five were in +the party. They were put under guard with the +others.</p> + +<p>The utmost care was observed during the night, +as the Illyas were known to be very foxy, and +half the force was detailed to keep guard.</p> + +<p>Early in the morning John's first care was to +make an investigation as to the character of the +provisions on hand, and to arrange that foraging +parties should be sent out to bring in vegetables.</p> + +<p>He was surprised to learn that the Illyas cultivated +many kinds of garden products, and fruit +was growing in abundance. This was found to be a +prudent thing to consider, when it will be remembered +that the village now had to feed over three +hundred of the allies, and that the penned-up +Illyas were not in a position to go out and bring +in the daily supply.</p> + +<p>The boys were fed at intervals during the night, +but before four they all felt so much restored +that sleep overtook them, and John advised them +to permit sleep, as that would be the best restorer, +and they were not disturbed until they naturally +awoke during the forenoon.</p> + +<p>A plentiful supply of broth was prepared, and +administered during the day. But Harry and +George were simply wild to explore the buildings. +The excitement had been too intense to enable +them to give it much thought. But now something +must be known about the buildings and the reason +for their erection at that place.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_210" id="p_210">p. 210</a></span></p> + +<p>John had questioned various ones about the +buildings, but none seemed to know anything concerning +them. Uraso and Muro were just as much +surprised as the whites. Neither had known of +the existence of a place with such buildings.</p> + +<p>It appears that the Illyas never allowed captives +to be confined in the village, and this was a +wise thing; because the escape of anyone would +be sure to inform the other tribes of the existence +of the Forbidden City.</p> + +<p>The remarkable thing about it, aside from the +buildings, was the plan upon which the town had +been built. It was regularly laid out. There were +three main buildings; the first and largest being +the one facing the west, with the Doric front. +The next largest had its front facing the south, +and this had Ionic columns. The third, and which +was not noticeable from a position west of the village, +was smaller than either, with a front of Tuscan +architecture.</p> + +<p>What did these buildings mean? By whom +were they erected, and for what purpose were they +intended? These were questions ever uppermost +in the minds of John and the boys.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_211" id="p_211">p. 211</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h2> + +<h3>THE MYSTERIOUS CAVE. RETURNING TO UNITY</h3> + + +<p>"It may be there are some sort of records or +tablets somewhere about the buildings which will +indicate what they were erected for; but my investigations +thus far leave me just as much in +the dark as when I first saw them," remarked +John, as they were examining the structures.</p> + +<p>"I wonder if they have corner stones? Sometimes +they put records there," observed Harry.</p> + +<p>"I made an examination in that direction also, +but the character of the underpinning is the same +all around, and the corners have no distinguishing +stones."</p> + +<p>"It must be a very old custom to have cornerstones +for buildings."</p> + +<p>"It was a custom to have cornerstones, or memorial +stones, in all buildings in ancient times. +They were well known in the time of Job, and +buildings thousands of years prior to his day contained +them. It is not known from what the custom +arose."</p> + +<p>"Didn't you say that the treasure charts showed +the existence of caves to the southeast of the cave +we found at the Tuolos' village?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, and that is something that we shall have +to investigate to-morrow. To-day the patients +still need our care, but they will be well enough +to enable us to be absent to-morrow."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_212" id="p_212">p. 212</a></span></p> + +<p>"I think we ought to make sketches of the plan +of this town. I have a presentiment that we shall +know something more about this place in the future," +said George.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 351px;"> +<a id="illus-212" name="illus-212" /> +<a href="#p_212"> +<img src="images/illus-fig20-p212.png" width="351" height="330" +alt="Fig. 20. The Peculiar Illya Village." title="Fig. 20. The Peculiar Illya Village." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 20. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Peculiar</span> <span class="u">Illya</span> <span class="u">Village</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"By all means have it prepared during the day. +Later on I may be able to give a pretty good +guess what all this means." And the boys looked +at each other significantly.</p> + +<p>If the chiefs, or any of the lower order, knew +anything about the origin of the town, they did +not make it apparent.</p> + +<p>"Do you notice one singular thing about this +town and the people in it?" asked John.</p> + +<p>Neither of the boys could guess.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_213" id="p_213">p. 213</a></span></p> + +<p>"Where are the medicine men, and those who +perform the sacred rites at their festivals?"</p> + +<p>The boys again looked at each other for an answer. +George replied: "I think they are at the +caves of which the charts give some indication," +finally exclaimed Harry.</p> + +<p>"That is the case, undoubtedly. That is where +we shall have the difficulty. The chiefs will not +disclose their hiding places. Before going on the +search we must question the chief."</p> + +<p>In the early morning John and the boys called +on the chief in company with Uraso. A complete +change had come over him. Two days before he +was sullen and moody, after the first lesson had +been given him. Now he was different and agreeable.</p> + +<p>"Before we start for the village of the Great +White Chief there are some questions I would +ask you. How many medicine men have you?"</p> + +<p>"Ten."</p> + +<p>"Where are they?"</p> + +<p>"In their dark homes."</p> + +<p>"Where are those homes?"</p> + +<p>"To the east. Sama will take you to them, but +you cannot go in."</p> + +<p>"Why not?"</p> + +<p>"Because you will be destroyed."</p> + +<p>"How do you know?"</p> + +<p>"Because they have told us so."</p> + +<p>"Do you believe them?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Do you sacrifice your captives because they tell +you the Great Spirit demands it?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_214" id="p_214">p. 214</a></span></p> + +<p>"Then I must tell you that they lie to you. +The Great Spirit does not tell them to sacrifice. +It is not death to enter their homes."</p> + +<p>"But we know that no one has ever come from +them alive."</p> + +<p>"Does the Great Spirit kill them when they go +in?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Do you want to know whether they tell the +truth?"</p> + +<p>"Yes."</p> + +<p>"Then I will go in, and show you that the Great +Spirit will not harm me."</p> + +<p>"How shall I know that you go in?"</p> + +<p>"You must go with me and stand at the opening."</p> + +<p>The chief's eyes now wandered about. He was +visibly affected at this bold declaration, and John +saw hesitation in his demeanor.</p> + +<p>Without giving him time to waver, he continued: +"The great Chief Oroto must not show his +people that he is afraid. He must show them that +he is greater and wiser than the medicine men, +and that the wise men who have told him those +tales have not told the truth."</p> + +<p>Turning to Uraso he said: "Prepare the wagon, +and we will start at once." The chief and two of +the sub-chiefs were taken out and placed in the +wagon. Harry, George, Uraso and Muro, with a +picked company of twenty-five men, were selected +to accompany them.</p> + +<p>The wagon was a curiosity to Oroto. He enjoyed +the ride immensely and admired the manner +in which Harry handled and guided the yaks.</p> + +<p>Their course was directed due east for a mile,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_215" id="p_215">p. 215</a></span> +and then moved along a well-beaten path diagonally +up the hill in a southern direction. After +proceeding thus for a half mile farther the ground, +became rough and cut up by innumerable gullies.</p> + +<p>"How much farther must we go?"</p> + +<p>"To the place where the great trees are." And +he pointed to a group of trees less than five hundred +feet beyond. Progress with the team was impossible, +and all alighted. Leaving three of the +warriors with the team, the others ascended the +slight elevation, and before them was the mouth +of the cavern.</p> + +<p>The opening was not more than eight feet in +height, and not over six feet wide, with irregular +sides. Arriving in front of it, John advanced to +Oroto, and said: "I am about to show you that the +Great Spirit will not injure me!" And saying so +boldly marched in.</p> + +<p>He remained for a full half hour, and the chief +became uneasy. The boys, as well as Uraso and +Muro, affected not to be disturbed. What John +did was this: It was evident to him that the occupants +of the cave had no knowledge of the approach +of the party.</p> + +<p>They knew that the White Chief and the allies +had captured the village and the chiefs. They felt +a certain sense of security in their home, because +in all the tribal warfares the medicine men and the +wise men of the tribes were regarded with fear and +reverence.</p> + +<p>When John entered the cave, he went in a sufficient +distance to be surrounded by total darkness. +He remained concealed long enough so that +he could become accustomed to the darkness, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_216" id="p_216">p. 216</a></span> +slowly moved toward the interior, as he felt assured +the occupants' presence would sooner or +later be revealed by their lights.</p> + +<p>In this he was not mistaken, and he was surprised +to find them much nearer the entrance than +he anticipated. It would be more impressive to remain +for some time than to emerge at once, so he +sat down to observe the wise men.</p> + +<p>There was the most oppressive silence when he +first observed the light, but as he neared them, a +more or less animated conversation took place. +Much of this was understood by John, as his knowledge +of two of the dialects gave him some key to +the words uttered. From this it was evident that +they knew of the rescue of the captives.</p> + +<p>The chief had told them of ten belonging to the +order. John could count only eight. Possibly +two were in some other part of the cavern, and +he moved along at the opposite side of the large +chamber to discover what was beyond.</p> + +<p>Brushing along the wall, a hanging stalactite +was dislodged, and it fell. The noise did not give +even a momentary start to the company. John +was surprised. He stopped and reflected, and the +reason soon became plain. They supposed that it +was caused by the absent ones returning.</p> + +<p>But John waited and the two did not return, +and they began to glance about. At this time he +was on the opposite side of the chamber, so that +the medicine men were between him and the mouth +of the cave.</p> + +<p>A half dozen of them had arisen, and John +stepped forward with his gun in position. In a +stentorian voice John shouted:</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_217" id="p_217">p. 217</a></span></p> + +<p>"I am the Great White Chief. Go to the door +of the cave. If any refuse he will die. Go!"</p> + +<p>It might be stated that before leaving for the +cave Uraso had fully instructed John how to use +the above phrases. His sudden apparition on the +side opposite the mouth of the cave was most startling +to them. Not a word was uttered by either.</p> + +<p>"Go!" again shouted John. They seemed to be +paralyzed. By a common impulse they moved toward +the entrance, and as they marched out and +saw the party there waiting to receive them, together +with their own chief, the consternation was +most marked on the faces of all.</p> + +<p>Addressing the chief, John said: "Here are your +wise men. The Great Spirit is not there. They +have lied to you."</p> + +<p>It was now apparent from the actions of the +chief why he was considered such a power and a +terror to his own people and to the tribes. He +was every inch a chief. He strode forward, and +would have crushed them with his own hands, but +John interposed.</p> + +<p>"We shall take care of them. They will never +again lie to the great chief Oroto." And so saying +they were ordered bound, and Uraso instructed +to take them to the village and carefully guard +them.</p> + +<p>"You may take the wagon with you, Uraso, as +the boys and I want to attend to some matters on +our own account, and we shall soon follow you."</p> + +<p>When the cavalcade passed from their sight, +John said: "I suppose we shall now have an opportunity +to examine the place. Have you any +candles?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_218" id="p_218">p. 218</a></span></p> + +<p>Harry had not forgotten them, and the boys +smiled as John also drew forth several, and thus +they entered the cave. John marched direct to +the place where the wise men had their quarters, +and their lamps were still burning.</p> + +<p>"By the way, we came in too soon. Two of them +are outside, or are somewhere in the cave. We +want them as well as the others. If they find us +here, they will be likely to get away. But we +are here now, and we must find out what we can, +and as quickly as possible." The lights at the habitable +part of the cave were left burning and the +three plunged into the passageway which led to the +east.</p> + +<p>"This is the cave noted in the chart. How fortunate +it is. You will note that this, like the other +cave, has also a cross-shaped formation, and the +treasure should be at the south branch."</p> + +<p>"Here it is," whispered George.</p> + +<p>"What, the treasure?" was Harry's eager question.</p> + +<p>"No; the south branch."</p> + +<p>"You are undoubtedly right. There is no other +opening."</p> + +<p>This branch was followed less than a hundred +feet, when a solid white wall appeared in front, +and it was readily seen that the channel terminated +in the chamber.</p> + +<p>The floor of this chamber was one mass of uneven +projections, entirely unlike the other parts +of the cave, and what was more singular still, it +was fully six feet higher than the floors of the +other portions, but it was absolutely devoid of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_219" id="p_219">p. 219</a></span> +any treasure, or anything which could contain such +a hoard as the chart seemed to indicate.</p> + +<p>"It is just as well," said John, resignedly. "I +suppose we have enough for our purposes."</p> + +<p>While crawling down the rough portion which +formed the elevated floor of the chamber Harry +slipped, and broke off a portion of the stalagmite +overlaying the side. It was dark beneath.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 347px;"> +<a id="illus-219" name="illus-219" /> +<a href="#p_219"> +<img src="images/illus-fig21-p219.png" width="347" height="217" +alt="Fig. 21. Diagram of the Cross-shaped Cave." title="Fig. 21. Diagram of the Cross-shaped Cave." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 21. <span class="u">Diagram</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Cross-shaped</span> <span class="u">Cave</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>"This is not calcareous matter," exclaimed +John.</p> + +<p>"What is it?" asked both in a breath.</p> + +<p>The lights were concentrated on a sample, and +as John raised his head he looked at the boys, +and slowly uttered one word:</p> + +<p>"Copper!"</p> + +<p>The boys did not at first grasp the true significance +of the word. It was marvelous to them that +copper should be found there, but John thought +of something else. It offered a possible explanation +to the origin of the buildings. Where were<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_220" id="p_220">p. 220</a></span> +the mines? Were they in the cave itself? This +was not copper ore. It was a partly refined product.</p> + +<p>It was evident to John, and further verified that +the entire chamber, which was fully sixty feet long +and fifty feet wide, was covered with a layer of +this copper for a height of six feet. A calculation +of the value could be readily made.</p> + +<p>John and the boys made their way out and past +the fires that were still burning, and which would +be relighted no more. The two absent ones were +not found. They had not returned. The reason +was explained when the village was reached. +They were captured by Uraso before they had left +the cave a thousand feet.</p> + +<p>During the day and the succeeding night the +patients improved each hour. Both of the invalid +boys were able to sit up. Rogers wanted a full +meal, but still none were allowed to indulge. John +announced that a start for home would be made +in the morning.</p> + +<p>There was intense bustle in the village the next +morning. The chief was informed that he and +two of his sub-chiefs would be required to accompany +them, together with one hundred of his warriors. +The ten wise (?) men were also to be of +the party.</p> + +<p>There was mingled feeling of emotion in the +minds of the people when they saw their great +chief for the first time in the knowledge of the +people humbled and taken captive by a foreign +tribe.</p> + +<p>It was well to leave them with that impression. +They would soon learn otherwise, and for the first<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_221" id="p_221">p. 221</a></span> +time begin to appreciate that the white man's +way is superior to their own.</p> + +<p>The boys and Gustave were in the wagon with +the Chief Oroto. The others were on foot. Occasionally +John would take a place and delight in the +chatter of the boys, and sometimes would listen +to remarks about Oroto, that would not have been +pleasant for his ears.</p> + +<p>John didn't blame them a bit for it either. The +pale, drawn faces of the two boys made them +pitiable objects, and when he saw them he felt +like cursing the chief who would permit such cruelties +to innocent boys. But he remembered that +the chief knew no better. He lived according to +the best that was given him. Why was he to be +blamed?</p> + +<p>There was hardly a subject but was canvassed +by the boys. The chief soon became interested, +and he frequently asked Lolo questions. Before +the journey ended the boys changed their opinions +about Oroto. Perhaps the vivacity of the boys attracted +him.</p> + +<p>But later on, through Lolo, he began to learn +things which astounded him. Muro had told his +son Lolo that Harry was the one who made the +wonderful guns, and this was communicated to the +chief. Harry was a hero to him from that time on. +Lolo told the chief about the wonderful things +which they were making at the new town, and +long before they sighted the place he was interested +just like a common mortal.</p> + +<p>But the Saboro village was in sight. "Moro," +asked John, "how long will it take to get your +family ready?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_222" id="p_222">p. 222</a></span></p> + +<p>"We shall go on with you this afternoon."</p> + +<p>They were ready and waiting when the train +came in sight. Lolo was out of the wagon and +sprang to his mother, just like any other boy +would do, and he told her in two minutes what +had happened in fifteen days. An American boy +could not have done better than that.</p> + +<p>Was Stut's family going, too? Certainly! The +boys laughed merrily. One wagon was given over +to the families, containing seven women and fourteen +children. But the wagons were lightened of +their heavy loads of provisions and easily accommodated +to emigrants.</p> + +<p>This was a happy party. The natives never +knew of such an outing. It was quite a cavalcade. +Just imagine four hundred warriors, the two wagons, +the women and the children, the men chanting +a peculiar song as they marched, occasionally +interspersed with laughter, and a constant flow +of talk about the new and wonderful place they +were going to, of the great white chiefs, and above +all the real and unaffected pleasure that grew out +of the knowledge that there would be no more +war.</p> + +<p>On the second day after leaving the Saboro village, +Unity came in sight. George crawled to the +top of the wagon, and, raising his hat and waving +it, began to cheer. Every warrior did likewise +when he saw the signal. It was a bedlam for a +few moments. The Illyas chief saw it and smiled.</p> + +<p>Unity heard the cheers. There was no more +work that day. The men in the fields came in. +Those in the workshops deserted their posts, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_223" id="p_223">p. 223</a></span> +lined up along the newly made sidewalks that had +been carefully arranged several days before.</p> + +<p>The women were out in force, and the children +in evidence everywhere. The two wagons were in +advance, Harry being in the lead. Not a man left +the town to rush out and greet them. The Professor +suggested that a more fitting welcome could +be given by forming lines to receive the warriors +as they filed by.</p> + +<p>The wagon was now within five hundred feet of +the end of the receiving line of the villagers. +Angel, the orang-outan, was in the line also. The +sight of the wagons was too much for him. He +scampered along the street in that peculiar shuffling +gait that all the villagers knew, and started +for the wagon.</p> + +<p>He was the only one in the town who disobeyed +the orders of the Professor. He knew that George +was in the wagon. He passed the first one, driven +by Harry, but he was up in the top of the second +in an instant, and he made his way to George's +side, and looked up in his face. George put his +arm around him, as he was accustomed to do, and +this was sufficient for him.</p> + +<p>The children screamed in delight, but Angel +didn't mind, because he saw that George didn't. +When George put his arm around Lolo's little +baby sister, Angel looked at George, reproachfully, +at first, but when George laughed Angel +emitted his well-known chuckle, which always indicated +delight, and he knew that all jealousy had +vanished.</p> + + + +<hr class="chapter" /> +<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_224" id="p_224">p. 224</a></span></p> +<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII</h2> + +<h3>BUILDING A SHIP TO TAKE THEM HOME</h3> + + +<p>Great was the surprise of Oroto to find that +Marmo, chief of the Tuolos, and Tastoa, chief +of the Kurabus, were in the town. Greater still +was the marvel to know that they were entirely +free to go and come, and when Uraso announced +to him that there were no restrictions on his liberty, +he wondered why he had been brought from +his village.</p> + +<p>This proceeding was most unusual. During the +preceding day, when they marched into the town, +he had been kept in one of the buildings under +guard, and had not seen the Professor, as the +latter first desired to confer with John, and learn +all about the facts about the chief and his actions.</p> + +<p>Oroto was most anxious to see the Great White +Chief, and when Uraso announced to him that he +was prepared to receive him, he was eager to +go. John thought it would be much better for +them to meet alone, because it was desired to +avoid all cause for jealousy among the different +chiefs, and it would, probably, be disagreeable to +have them present. All must be present, or none.</p> + +<p>Uraso conducted him to the door of the Professor's +apartment, and left him. As he entered, the +Professor came forward, and grasped his hand, +and put his arm around him, and in that manner +conducted him to a seat.</p> + +<p>The chief looked at him, and saw the strong,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_225" id="p_225">p. 225</a></span> +handsome face and the white beard and hair. +He appeared to be awed by the sight, as he was +affected by the kind reception. He was far from +assuming the defiant attitude with which he met +John.</p> + +<p>"I welcome you," said the Professor. "I know +we can be friends."</p> + +<p>The chief was overcome by the greeting words. +It was plain that he had prepared for an entirely +different kind of meeting. He did not answer, +but sat there with eyes riveted on the Professor, +and the latter continued:</p> + +<p>"I hope my warriors have treated you right, +and that they have not injured any of your people."</p> + +<p>When Oroto had recovered from his surprise +he responded:</p> + +<p>"Why do you call me your friend?"</p> + +<p>The Professor smiled, and he answered: "Are +you my enemy?"</p> + +<p>This was a question which was unexpected. +What manner of man was this? The Professor +saw the struggle in the chief's mind, as he tried +to frame a reply.</p> + +<p>"I was your enemy; but I do not see why I +should be. I was told that you were a terrible +chief."</p> + +<p>"Who told you so?"</p> + +<p>"The wise men."</p> + +<p>"Do you believe them?"</p> + +<p>"No; I shall kill them, because they have lied +to me and my people."</p> + +<p>"Why do you wish to kill them? Will that do +you or your people any good?"</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_226" id="p_226">p. 226</a></span></p> + +<p>"Then what can I do with people who deceive +us?"</p> + +<p>"Teach them to understand and know that it is +better to tell the truth than to lie. When you do +that you are also teaching the people what is +right. If you kill them you are teaching people +revenge, and revenge will not help them."</p> + +<p>"You are telling me something new and strange. +My people would not understand that. They +would think I feared to punish."</p> + +<p>"The white man does not think so. He believes +that each man is entitled to his life. If he +does wrong, he may be deprived of his liberty, +and made to labor for others, and pleasures kept +from him, but that his life should not be taken +from him, unless he has committed the greatest +crime against the people."</p> + +<p>"What is the greatest crime?"</p> + +<p>"The killing of another."</p> + +<p>"I am in your power. What do you want me to +do? What will you do with me? I did not know +you taught such things."</p> + +<p>"You are in my village; but you are free to go +where you will. My chief did not bring you here +to humiliate you, or to punish you. I told him to +bring you here so you might know how the white +men live, and how they try to make the people +happy. You can see these things for yourself. +Then you can understand."</p> + +<p>"I am told that you have people here from all +the tribes, and that they live together in peace +and in contentment."</p> + +<p>"Yes; and why not? Because one man was born +and lives in one place, is that any reason why he<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_227" id="p_227">p. 227</a></span> +should be the enemy of one who lives somewhere +else?"</p> + +<p>"But how can we prevent them from fighting +each other?"</p> + +<p>"Let all the chiefs agree to do what is right +to each other, and to their people; and treat each +man the same, whether he belongs to your tribe +or to some other. Do not seek revenge, but justice."</p> + +<p>"I shall forever be the White Chief's friend."</p> + +<p>"But you must be not only my friend, but the +friend of all the chiefs. They have agreed to +live together in peace. We will find work for all +your people to do, so they can become happy and +strong, and I want you to go with me to see the +things we are doing to help the people. Before +we do so you must talk to the chiefs who have +been here and who know what we are trying to +bring about."</p> + +<p>Oroto sought out Marmo at once. He was the +nearest in kin to the Illyas, and the Professor +noted this action on his part with the greatest satisfaction. +Soon Tastoa, of the Kurabus, was +brought in, and no restraint was placed on any of +these conferences.</p> + +<p>When all the whites met that night you may be +sure that there was a jollification that knew no +bounds. What a wonderful thing had been accomplished. +All grasped the Professor's hand, and +many tears were shed in the joy of the meeting. +Six boys and three men had been rescued from the +jaws of death by the Professor and the two boys.</p> + +<p>In less than two years they had transformed an +island of savage races into some semblance of or<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_228" id="p_228">p. 228</a></span>derly +life, and inspired the people with a new +impulse. It was the first time the chiefs of the +island had ever met together. Within a week all +were on friendly terms with each other.</p> + +<p>At the conference that evening the Professor +remarked: "We have now put in nearly two years +of hard work, and accomplished the most wonderful +results. The boys want to go home, and it is +right that they should. Owing to the peculiar conditions +existing here, we have not been in a position +where we could take any organized steps +to go home. As long as any of our friends were +in captivity it was our duty to remain."</p> + +<p>"The situation is different now. We have really +started a little empire here. This is the 'Empire' +that Harry spoke about when we landed here. +He little knew how prophetic that was. We now +have the men, the material, the energy, and the +ingenuity to make anything that is made anywhere +in the world."</p> + +<p>"We must build a ship—"</p> + +<p>But the Professor could go no further. The +boys were wild with excitement at the news, as +they gathered about him.</p> + +<p>"But I am coming back again," cried one after +the other.</p> + +<p>"But I am not going away," added the Professor, +"because I am afraid I should never be able +to come back again."</p> + +<p>There was a tone of sadness as he said this, +and it touched all the boys. It was hard to tell +whether this was an occasion for joy or sorrow.</p> + +<p>All knew what the Professor and John and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_229" id="p_229">p. 229</a></span> +Blakely felt, and that it would become their great +field for future work.</p> + +<p>Here was also a field for the energies of the +boys, whose abilities could be directed into useful +channels. Commercially the island was of immense +value, if properly used. So long as John +and the Professor were there no wrong speculative +efforts would dare to be attempted by unscrupulous +adventurers.</p> + +<p>John, together with Harry, Tom and Jim, who +were the engineering force of the island, soon began +the work of preparing the material for the +ship which would place them in communication +with the great world.</p> + +<p>The three new boys were initiated into the crafthood +which was ever widening and gaining new +recruits. The natives showed remarkable aptitude +for the various branches of work. But the +Professor and Blakely had other ideas than to +train too many of them to labor in the mechanical +lines.</p> + +<p>Here was a land, rich in soil, capable of growing +any crop, or adapted to give up its bounty in the +form of many valuable kinds of produce. Rubber, +coffee, spices, cocoanuts, the finest fibers, in +variety, and all of them now growing wild.</p> + +<p>This land must be occupied and tilled by a people +adapted to the soil and climate. The principles +of agriculture must be instilled. What a +wonderful work to contemplate!</p> + +<p>The schoolhouse was ready, but there were no +books. Robert had taken the preliminary lessons +as an artist, and was very handy with the brush +and pencil. Entirely on his own initiative, he<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_230" id="p_230">p. 230</a></span> +prepared a set of letters, containing the caps of +the alphabet, and these were cut out by him, and +the work so delighted the Professor that he instructed +the boys how to cast the whole series +at one time, so that a good stock of type was finally +turned out.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em;"> +<a id="illus-235" name="illus-235" /> +<a href="#p_231"> +<img src="images/illus-p235.jpg" width="400" height="590" +alt="The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction which Tom and Ralph had gone on the former trip" +title="The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction which Tom and Ralph had gone on the former trip" /> +</a> +<span class="caption">"<i>The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction which Tom and Ralph had gone on the former trip</i>"</span> +<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_235">See p. 235</a>]</p> +</div> + +<p>"I have an idea," said Robert, "that it would be +a good thing to put some pictures in the primer; +just enough to make it look attractive."</p> + +<p>"That would be fun," answered Min. "Don't +say anything to the Professor about it."</p> + +<p>The latter had already arranged a simple press, +but when the latter was nearing completion, Roy +burst out laughing, as he remarked: "Type is a +good thing, and so is a printing press, but I am +interested in knowing where we are going to get +the paper."</p> + +<p>"Paper?" exclaimed George; "lots of it growing +all about here." And he looked at the boys a +little maliciously. "All we need to do is to go out +and gather it."</p> + +<p>"Paper growing? Well, I have seen many things +here, but that is something new to me."</p> + +<p>"Do you know what the plantain tree is, the tree, +with the big sprawling leaves? Those leaves will +make good sheets for printing on."</p> + +<p>The Professor heard the last part of the conversation, +and remarked: "We might as well make +paper, and I have already asked Harry to make +a grinder for furnishing the pulp. We have the +finest paper stock in the world."</p> + +<p>"Yes," exclaimed George; "the ramie."</p> + +<p>"No; not that. There is a reason why hemp,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_231" id="p_231">p. 231</a></span> +and many other fibers are better than that. Do +you recall the peculiarity about ramie?"</p> + +<p>Harry remembered. It resists moisture, and +while it makes an excellent paper would be difficult +with their crude means to turn it out satisfactorily. +The grinding machine was a simple affair, +and the fiber was fed through again and again, +until it was cut up into short lengths.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 362px;"> +<a id="illus-231" name="illus-231" /> +<a href="#p_231"> +<img src="images/illus-fig22-p231.png" width="362" height="374" +alt="Fig. 22. Paper Making Machine." title="Fig. 22. Paper Making Machine." /> +</a> +<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 22. <span class="u">Paper</span> <span class="u">Making</span> <span class="u">Machine</span>.</span> +</div> + +<p>The principal thing, however, in paper making +is to get it the same thickness. "It will take too<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_232" id="p_232">p. 232</a></span> +long to make a cylinder, which makes the paper +even, and distribute the pulp perfectly, and in +the absence of that I have ordered an apparatus +which will turn out a sheet at a time."</p> + +<p>The Professor then exhibited a drawing, and +continued: "Notice the box, which is two feet +square inside and two feet high. See this cleat +all around the inside, six inches from the top. +That is to hold the frame of a cloth web, which +fits in the box exactly."</p> + +<p>"At the bottom of the box is a pipe, right in +the middle. This pipe is for the purpose of carrying +the water into the box. Below the box is a +larger box, and this contains the water which has +the pulp mixed with it, just enough of the pulp to +make it look cloudy.</p> + +<p>"The water in the box is carried into the box by +the pump. When the screen, or web, is placed in +position, and the pump set to work, the water, carrying +the pulp, moves upwardly in the box, and +the fine particles of pulp are caught by the screen +and held there, the little fibers lying crisscross +over each other.</p> + +<p>"Every minute or so the screen with the paper +mat on its underside must be taken out and another +put in, and the matted paper on each screen +put under a press, and the water squeezed out, +after which it will readily peel off the screen, and +when it is dried it makes a good blotting paper. +To make a writing paper of it, the sheet must be +run through a number of heavily weighted steel +rollers, but we don't need that for printing our +books."</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_233" id="p_233">p. 233</a></span></p> + +<p>The paper was made in that manner, and the +Professor was delighted when he saw the illustrations. +Thus the first serious attempt was made +to begin the teaching of the children, and when +the books were ready the boys were all happy to +undertake the work of teaching. It was here that +the Tuolo medicine men were utilized, and it may +be said to their credit that they found the new +calling agreeable and pleasant.</p> + +<p>But there is still so much to be said about the +town, the people, the actions of the chiefs, the +work that was being prosecuted, the farms and +plantations that were started, the manufactured +articles turned out, the new houses erected everywhere, +and the intense interest exhibited by the +people under the new order of things.</p> + +<p>The boys knew they had been a great factor in +the regeneration of the island, and were proud of +it. Lolo, and boys of like ages with our boys, were +given special training, due to the suggestion of +the Professor. Some were taught the theory of +medicine, as the necessity of proper medical treatment +was essential. Many received the rudimentary +knowledge of carpentry and other occupations +from John.</p> + +<p>The ship was the principal topic of conversation, +and to that the main energies were directed. +The finest oak trees were cut and brought in; a +new and larger sawmill installed; the machine +shop was busy day and night in the making of +two new lathes, a planer, and several drilling machines.</p> + +<p>During the rush and the excitement of all these<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_234" id="p_234">p. 234</a></span> +new enterprises, the boys could not forget their +earlier experiences, and about the mysterious +things which formed parts of their adventures.</p> + +<p>To enumerate all of them would take too much +space, and be unnecessary, but some of them had +an intense personal interest, and they recalled +how the missing flag was accounted for when John +appeared; the removal of their boat at the Palls +of South River was explained; the discovery of +the light beyond the West River really indicated +the location of the savage village.</p> + +<p>But there were other things still unaccounted +for, and the boys craved a solution to the mysterious +happenings. Who wrote the message +found in the <i>Investigator's</i> lifeboat, No. 3? Who +took the flagstaff at Observation Hill? Who +placed the crude oars and the strange ropes in +their boat which was found stranded on the sea +beach ten miles from the place where they left it?</p> + +<p>The boys determined to know these things, and +they trusted to the future to be able to give the +answers.</p> + +<p>Little of the time was devoted to pleasure now. +The great forest to the west was looked on by +the boys with longing eyes many times. They had +heard about the experience at Blakely's old home +on the hill. One day Harry said: "There is one +thing lacking in the town."</p> + +<p>"What is it?" asked Tom.</p> + +<p>"The American flag."</p> + +<p>"Good! We must get a fitting flag pole for +that."</p> + +<p>All the boys conspired together that night.</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_235" id="p_235">p. 235</a></span></p> + +<p>They would go to the great forest and bring in +the finest pole to be found. Jack and Jill and +Angel must go with them; and Lolo and his best +boy friend were invited.</p> + +<p>Early in the morning, without giving anyone +an idea of their intentions, the guns and the bolos +were loaded on the wagon, and plenty of provisions, +you may be assured. George and Ralph +manned the large boat, so that the crossing of the +river would be facilitated. The wagon still had +the fort sections, which were taken along so that +could be floated across.</p> + +<p>Within an hour the main river was reached and +the float sections attached, so that the yaks plunged +in and drew the wagon across, while the boat +was drawn up on shore to await their return.</p> + +<p>The party plunged into the forest, taking the +direction which Ralph and Tom had gone on the +former trip. Quantities of game were bagged, +but there was no exciting incident. The pole was +the main thing, after all, and when they tramped +in every direction the selection was narrowed +down to two fine specimens of shellbark hickory, +and one was felled and trimmed, and after hoisting +one end on the wagon, the other was put on +the truck and the party drove into Unity in the +afternoon.</p> + +<p>The inhabitants swarmed the streets at the +novel spectacle. The Professor, John, Blakely +and Rogers instantly divined the meaning of the +pole.</p> + +<p>"Where shall we put it up?" asked Harry.</p> + +<p>"Right in the center of the town," was the Pro<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_236" id="p_236">p. 236</a></span>fessor's +response. "To-morrow is flag-raising +day, and it shall be a holiday!"</p> + +<p>Before night the hole had been dug, and the immense +pole erected.</p> + +<p>When "Old Glory" went up the next day there +was nothing lacking but the music; the hats of +everyone came off as the flag slowly ascended, and +the cheers that came from the throats of the natives +could not have been more intense, nor the +enthusiasm greater, if participated in by genuine +Americans.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 343px;"> +<a id="illus-236" name="illus-236" /> +<a href="#p_236"> +<img src="images/illus-fig23-p236.png" width="343" height="309" alt="Old Glory" title="Old Glory" /> +</a> +<span class="caption"><span class="smcap">Old Glory</span></span> +</div> + + +<p class="center"><br /><br />THE END</p> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_237" id="p_237">p. 237</a></span></p> + + +<hr class="major" /> +<h3><a name="GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS" id="GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS"></a>GLOSSARY OF WORDS</h3> +<h3>USED IN TEXT</h3> + +<table border="0" cellpadding="2" width="86%" cellspacing="0" summary="Glossary"> +<col style="width:15%;" /> +<col style="width:85%;" /> +<tbody valign="top"> +<tr><td align='left'>Astrologer.</td><td align='left'>An interpreter of the supposed influence of the stars on the destinies of man.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Accumulation.</td><td align='left'>To add to; gathering little by little. A store of things.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Acquiring.</td><td align='left'>To receive or gain in whatsoever manner.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Accosted.</td><td align='left'>To speak to; to address; to approach.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Adequate.</td><td align='left'>Sufficient; enough.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Alluring.</td><td align='left'>That which attracts; to have a fancy for.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Alternative.</td><td align='left'>Either one or the other.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Animated.</td><td align='left'>Lively; sparkling; exhilarating.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Apportion.</td><td align='left'>To divide and distribute or assign.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Aptitude.</td><td align='left'>Suited to the work; well adapted.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Betokened.</td><td align='left'>To give a promise or evidence of.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Cardinal.</td><td align='left'>The main feature; the original.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Calcareous.</td><td align='left'>Partaking of lime.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Capillary.</td><td align='left'>That capacity in liquids to cohere to material.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Celerity.</td><td align='left'>Quickly; with speed.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Climax.</td><td align='left'>To bring to a conclusion.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Chaparral.</td><td align='left'>A dense cluster of small trees.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Cooperation.</td><td align='left'>Acting together; in concert.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Concise.</td><td align='left'>Short and to the point.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Cohesive.</td><td align='left'>To stick together; to adhere to each other.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Comprehend.</td><td align='left'>To understand.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Compact.</td><td align='left'>In a small space.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Concentrated.</td><td align='left'>To bring together.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Commotion.</td><td align='left'>Not orderly; violent agitation; tumult.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Cringed.</td><td align='left'>To bow in servility; to wince.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Deterred.</td><td align='left'>Prevented; kept from.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Devoid.</td><td align='left'>To be without; bereft.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Depredations.</td><td align='left'>The act of plundering or laying waste.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Decorum.</td><td align='left'>In an orderly manner.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Demoniacs.</td><td align='left'>Influenced by demons, or possessed with bad spirit.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_238" id="p_238">p. 238</a></span></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Detained.</td><td align='left'>Held as a captive.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Deftly.</td><td align='left'>Neat and skillful in action.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Diagonally.</td><td align='left'>Across from corner to corner.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Dismantle.</td><td align='left'>To take apart; to dissever.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Discernible.</td><td align='left'>To see.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Disinfectant.</td><td align='left'>To make germ proof; to make sanitary.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Diversified.</td><td align='left'>A variety; having different qualities; many of the same kind.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Disclose.</td><td align='left'>To show; to advise or inform.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Doctrine.</td><td align='left'>That which is taught or set forth for belief.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Drones.</td><td align='left'>Those which are not busy, or prone to shirk.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Effusive.</td><td align='left'>Talkative.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Emboldened.</td><td align='left'>One who is encouraged to go forward.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Entrapped.</td><td align='left'>One who is caught by some design on the part of another.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Emotional.</td><td align='left'>An excitement of the mind.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Emaciated.</td><td align='left'>Lean; thin from want of food.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Emulated.</td><td align='left'>To copy after; to take pattern from.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Enumerated.</td><td align='left'>Counted.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Entrancing.</td><td align='left'>To put into a state of delight.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Ethics.</td><td align='left'>The philosophy of morals.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Evolutions.</td><td align='left'>A term employed to show the manner in which soldiers are trained.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Factor.</td><td align='left'>One of the elements in a problem.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Fantastical.</td><td align='left'>Peculiarly garbed; out of the natural manner.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Fascination.</td><td align='left'>A peculiar drawing to; pleasant attraction.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Function.</td><td align='left'>Any specific act or power that belongs to an agent.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Gratified.</td><td align='left'>Satisfied; well pleased.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Hilarity.</td><td align='left'>Joy; the state of being demonstratively happy.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Identical.</td><td align='left'>The same; exactly alike.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Impulse.</td><td align='left'>That which is done at the moment.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Imprecations.</td><td align='left'>To hurl defiance; to bring down maledictions.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Impressed.</td><td align='left'>To produce an effect; warned.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Imperiously.</td><td align='left'>In a haughty manner; in a way to indicate power.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Imitated.</td><td align='left'>To do in the same manner.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Initiated.</td><td align='left'>To bring into; to make familiar with; to install.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Imposing.</td><td align='left'>Adapted to make an impression.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Interspersed.</td><td align='left'>To put between or among.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Indication.</td><td align='left'>To show; to give an idea of.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Instilling.</td><td align='left'>To educate; to teach.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_239" id="p_239">p. 239</a></span></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Installed.</td><td align='left'>To establish; to put in the proper place.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Inculcate.</td><td align='left'>To teach by principle, or otherwise.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Indignant.</td><td align='left'>Anger or scorn aroused by a wrong act.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Instigation.</td><td align='left'>To entice another to do a thing.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Indefatigable.</td><td align='left'>Continual act in doing a thing; not weary in work or play.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Innumerable.</td><td align='left'>A large number; many of the same kind or thing.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Indited.</td><td align='left'>To put into words or writing.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Irritability.</td><td align='left'>Rubbing against; friction of part.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Irrepressible.</td><td align='left'>Difficult to control; hard to keep down.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Instrumental.</td><td align='left'>The means by which a thing is done.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Malediction.</td><td align='left'>A wish that harm may come; a curse.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Medium.</td><td align='left'>A means; an object that enables the carrying out of a design.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Muster roll.</td><td align='left'>The list of a set of men who have combined for an object.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Maneuvered.</td><td align='left'>The arranging of forces in a certain manner.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Naturalist.</td><td align='left'>One versed in natural history.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Omen.</td><td align='left'>A sign; a favorable or unfavorable issue.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Pendant.</td><td align='left'>Hanging; an article suspended; swinging below.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Penetrated.</td><td align='left'>Going into; entering a body.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Phase.</td><td align='left'>One form; a particular manner.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Projection.</td><td align='left'>To give out; a throwing, shooting or sending out.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Precarious.</td><td align='left'>Rather dangerous; not the safest.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Profusion.</td><td align='left'>A quantity; many of the same kind or quality.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Presentiment.</td><td align='left'>Believing or feeling beforehand.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Prescribing.</td><td align='left'>Setting forth; explaining in detail.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Precipitous.</td><td align='left'>Doing quickly; acting without considering results.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Restriction.</td><td align='left'>Within certain bounds or limits.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Restoration.</td><td align='left'>To bring back to its original form.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Requiting.</td><td align='left'>To pay; to give just dues.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Requisition.</td><td align='left'>The necessity for a thing; to call for some quality or article.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Regeneration.</td><td align='left'>To make over anew; to better.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Reconstructed.</td><td align='left'>To put into a better condition; or to restore to its original form.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Rhythmic.</td><td align='left'>Made to correspond in sound, in a regular or determined time.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Rudimentary.</td><td align='left'>Original, or basic.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_240" id="p_240">p. 240</a></span></td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Saturated.</td><td align='left'>To thoroughly fill a substance, as with a liquid so it will not hold more.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Scantling.</td><td align='left'>A piece of sawn timber, used as the upright support of a building.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Seclusion.</td><td align='left'>Hidden; kept out of sight.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Semblance.</td><td align='left'>The same as; likened unto.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Simulating.</td><td align='left'>To copy; to imitate.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Smelter.</td><td align='left'>A furnace for melting metals.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Solicitation.</td><td align='left'>Asking for anything; requesting, by petition or otherwise.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Stimulating.</td><td align='left'>To encourage; to cause to act.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Stalagmite.</td><td align='left'>An incrustation on the floor of a cave or cavern.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Stalactite.</td><td align='left'>The calcareous or lime hangings on the walls and ceilings of a cavern.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Stipulated.</td><td align='left'>Set forth in some particular manner.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Tactics.</td><td align='left'>The science or art of military evolutions.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Talisman.</td><td align='left'>Something that produces or is capable of bringing about a wonderful effect.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Tempered.</td><td align='left'>The quality in a metal of hardening.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Tissues.</td><td align='left'>The flesh, muscles and organic materials of a body.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Tournament.</td><td align='left'>A festival of ancient time; games and feats of arms.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Transmitted.</td><td align='left'>Sent away; forwarded to a distant place.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Transport.</td><td align='left'>Carried away by joyful news or emotions.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Typical.</td><td align='left'>A good sample; the like in kind.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Unaffected.</td><td align='left'>Not influenced; without emotion.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Undulating.</td><td align='left'>Wavy; rolling.</td></tr> +<tr><td align='left'>Unscrupulous.</td><td align='left'>Not guided by a right course; wrongful actions.</td></tr> +</tbody></table> + + + +<hr class="major" /> + +<h2>THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS</h2> +<hr class="minor" /> +<h3><span class="smcap">Carpentry for Boys</span></h3> + +<p>A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner +all subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care +and use of tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; +the principles involved in the building of various kinds of structures, +and the rudiments of architecture. It contains over two +hundred and fifty illustrations made especially for this work, and +includes also a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the +art. The most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published +for boys.</p> +<hr class="minor" /> +<h3><span class="smcap">Electricity for Boys</span></h3> + +<p>The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental +principles in each phase of the science, and practically +applying the work in the successive stages. It shows how the +knowledge has been developed, and the reasons for the various +phenomena, without using technical words so as to bring it within +the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of terms, and +is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.</p> +<hr class="minor" /> +<h3><span class="smcap">Practical Mechanics for Boys</span></h3> + +<p>This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of +practical shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure +and handling of shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized +to perform the work, and the manner in which all dimensional work +is carried out. Every subject is illustrated, and model building +explained. It contains a glossary which comprises a new system of +cross references, a feature that will prove a welcome departure in +explaining subjects. Fully illustrated.</p> +<hr class="minor" /> +<p class="center"> +<br /> +<i>Price 60 cents per volume</i> +<br /> +</p> + +<hr class="major" /> +<h2><span class="smcap">The Hickory Ridge Boy Scouts</span></h2> + +<h3>A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS</h3> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;font-size: 85%; text-align:center;"> + Which, in addition to the interesting boy scout stories by CAPTAIN ALAN<br/> + DOUGLAS, Scoutmaster, contain articles on nature lore, native animals<br/> + and a fund of other information pertaining to out-of-door life,<br/> + that will appeal to the boy's love of the open<br/> +</p> +<hr class="minor" /> +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>I. The Campfires of the Wolf Patrol</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid opportunities to use +their recently acquired knowledge in a practical way. Elmer Chenoweth, a lad +from the northwest woods, astonishes everyone by his familiarity with camp +life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should read.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>II. Woodcraft; or, How a Patrol Leader Made Good</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +This tale presents many stirring situations in which some of the boys are called +upon to exercise all their ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled with +healthful excitement.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>III. Pathfinder; or, The Missing Tenderfoot</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to the credit +of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow fast, one after the other.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>IV. Fast Nine; or, a Challenge From Fairfield</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description of the +final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome thereof, form a +stirring narrative. One of the best baseball stories of recent years.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>V. Great Hike; or, The Pride of The Khaki Troop</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest undertaking. +Their march takes them far from home, and the good-natured rivalry of the +different patrols furnishes many interesting and amusing situations.</p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>VI. Endurance Test; or, How Clear Grit Won the Day</b></p> + +<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face of apparent +failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and surprise their most +ardent admirers. One of the best stories Captain Douglas has written.</p> + +<hr class="minor" /> +<p style="text-indent: 0;font-size: 85%; text-align:center;"><b>Boy Scout Nature Lore to be Found in The Hickory Ridge<br/>Boy +Scout Series</b></p> + +<p style="text-align: left; text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;"> +Wild Animals of the United States—Tracking—in Number I.<br/> +Trees and Wild Flowers of the United States in Number II.<br/> +Reptiles of the United States in Number III.<br/> +Fishes of the United States in Number IV.<br/> +Insects of the United States in Number V.<br/> +Birds of the United States in Number VI.</p> + +<p class="center"><i>Cloth Binding Cover Illustrations in Four Colors 40c. per volume</i></p> + +<p class="center">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p> +<p class="center">147 FOURTH AVENUE (near 14th St.) NEW YORK</p> + + +<p> </p> +<p> </p> +<hr class="full" /> +<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: CONQUEST OF THE SAVAGES***</p> +<p>******* This file should be named 21832-h.txt or 21832-h.zip *******</p> +<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/3/21832">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/8/3/21832</a></p> +<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed.</p> + +<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution.</p> + + + +<pre> +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's +eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, +compressed (zipped), HTML and others. + +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over +the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. +VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving +new filenames and etext numbers. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a> + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + +EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000, +are filed in directories based on their release date. If you want to +download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular +search system you may utilize the following addresses and just +download by the etext year. + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a> + + (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99, + 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90) + +EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are +filed in a different way. The year of a release date is no longer part +of the directory path. The path is based on the etext number (which is +identical to the filename). The path to the file is made up of single +digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename. For +example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at: + +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234 + +or filename 24689 would be found at: +http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689 + +An alternative method of locating eBooks: +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a> + +*** END: FULL LICENSE *** +</pre> +</body> +</html> diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig1-p018.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig1-p018.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..fcac565 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig1-p018.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig10-p084.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig10-p084.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4e5d438 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig10-p084.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig11-p092.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig11-p092.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..acace99 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig11-p092.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig12-p093.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig12-p093.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4a95735 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig12-p093.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig13-p131.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig13-p131.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cbcca53 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig13-p131.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig14-p137.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig14-p137.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae1fb77 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig14-p137.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig15-p140.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig15-p140.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..51263e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig15-p140.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig16-p166.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig16-p166.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9a0f36d --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig16-p166.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig17-p167.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig17-p167.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c097275 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig17-p167.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig18-p170.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig18-p170.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8a031a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig18-p170.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig19-p179.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig19-p179.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..dfd6693 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig19-p179.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig2-p026.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig2-p026.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3bf6498 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig2-p026.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig20-p212.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig20-p212.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f424a7f --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig20-p212.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig21-p219.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig21-p219.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8768171 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig21-p219.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig22-p231.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig22-p231.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..45f4291 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig22-p231.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig23-p236.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig23-p236.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..145efff --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig23-p236.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig3-p029.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig3-p029.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea913be --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig3-p029.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig4-p045.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig4-p045.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..56a5be4 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig4-p045.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig5-p065.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig5-p065.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9f1bd79 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig5-p065.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig6-p068.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig6-p068.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bddbfdd --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig6-p068.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig7-p071.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig7-p071.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc0dff9 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig7-p071.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig8-p076.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig8-p076.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3022893 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig8-p076.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig9-p077.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig9-p077.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b32ddd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig9-p077.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-nybc.png b/21832-h/images/illus-nybc.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a9077e --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-nybc.png diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-p003.jpg b/21832-h/images/illus-p003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1bdad7d --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-p003.jpg diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-p035.jpg b/21832-h/images/illus-p035.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c26806 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-p035.jpg diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-p095.jpg b/21832-h/images/illus-p095.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b4315e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-p095.jpg diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-p235.jpg b/21832-h/images/illus-p235.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5d7e791 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/illus-p235.jpg diff --git a/21832-h/images/spine-cover.jpg b/21832-h/images/spine-cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0eba69 --- /dev/null +++ b/21832-h/images/spine-cover.jpg |
